Series H2 AC V/HZ and Open Vector Control: Installation & Operating Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 143

Series H2 AC

V/Hz and Open Vector Control

Installation & Operating Manual

5/07 MN740
Any trademarks used in this manual are the property of their respective owners.

Important:
Be sure to check www.baldor.com for the latest software, firmware and drivers
for your H2 product.
Table of Contents

Section 1
Quick Start Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Section 2
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Safety Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Section 3
Receiving & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Receiving & Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Location and Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Optional Remote Keypad Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Power Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Line Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Line Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Load Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Power Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Reduced Input Voltage Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Optional Filter/Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3 Phase Power and Motor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Operating a Three Phase Control on Single Phase Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Single Phase Power Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Single Phase Power and Motor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1
M-Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Optional Dynamic Brake Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
External Trip Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Control Board Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Opto Isolated Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Standard Run 2Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Standard Run 3Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
15 Preset Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Fan Pump 2Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Fan Pump 3Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Process Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3 Speed Analog 2Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3 Speed Analog 3Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
E-POT 2Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
E-POT 3Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Profile Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Bipolar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Multiple Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Relay Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

MN740 Table of Contents i


Communication Expansion Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
RS485 Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Opto-Isolated Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Opto Isolated Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Pre-Operation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Powerup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Install USB Driver for H2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Install Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Update Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Section 4
Programming and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Status Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Quick Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Save Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Restore Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Operating the Control from the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Accessing the Keypad JOG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Speed Adjustment using Local Speed Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Section 5
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Diagnostics Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Fault Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Electrical Noise Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 1
Section 6
Specifications, Ratings & Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Catalog Number Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Terminal Tightening Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Section 7
H2 PLC Mode Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Section
H2 Composite Reference Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Section 9
Monitor and RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Appendix A
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Dynamic Braking (DB) Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Keypad Extension Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Expansion Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Series H to H2 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Appendix B
Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Appendix C
CE Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Appendix D
Remote Keypad Mounting Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

ii Table of Contents MN740


Section 1
Quick Start Guide

Overview If you are an experienced user of Baldor controls, you are probably already familiar with the keypad programming
and keypad operation methods. If so, this quick start guide has been prepared for you. This procedure will help
get your system up and running in the keypad mode quickly and allows motor and control operation to be
verified. This procedure assumes that the Control, Motor and Dynamic Brake hardware are correctly installed
(see Section 3 for procedures) and that you have an understanding of the keypad programming & operation
procedures Figure 1‐1 shows minimum connection requirements. It is not necessary to wire the terminal strip to
operate in the Keypad mode (Section 3 describes terminal strip wiring procedures). The quick start procedure is
as follows:
1. Read the Safety Notice and Precautions in section 2 of this manual.
2. Mount the control. Refer to Section 3 “Physical Location” procedure.
3. Connect AC power, (Figure 1‐1).
4. Connect the motor, (Figure 1‐1). Do not couple the motor shaft to the load until auto tune is complete.
5. Install Dynamic brake hardware, if required. Refer to Section 3 “Optional Dynamic Brake Hardware”.
Quick Start Checklist Check of electrical items.
CAUTION: After completing the installation but before you apply power, be sure to check the
following items.
1. Verify AC line voltage at source matches control rating.
2. Inspect all power connections for accuracy, workmanship and torques as well as compliance to codes.
3. Verify control and motor are grounded to each other and the control is connected to earth ground.
4. Check all signal wiring for accuracy.
5. Be certain all brake coils, contactors and relay coils have noise suppression. This should be an R‐C
filter for AC coils and reverse polarity diodes for DC coils. MOV type transient suppression is not
adequate.
WARNING: Make sure that unexpected operation of the motor shaft during start up will not cause
injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
Quick Start Procedure
Initial Conditions
Be sure the Control, Motor and Dynamic Brake hardware are wired according to the procedures described in
Section 3 of this manual. Become familiar with the keypad programming and keypad operation of the control as
described in Section 4 of this manual.
1. Remove all power from the control.
2. Verify that any enable inputs to J2‐8 are open.
3. Disconnect the motor from the load (including coupling or inertia wheels).
4. Turn power on. Be sure there are no faults.
5. Set the Level 2 Drive Limits block, “OPERATING ZONE” parameter as desired
(STD CONST TQ, STD VAR TQ, QUIET CONST TQ or QUIET VAR TQ).
6. If external dynamic brake hardware is used, set the Level 2 Brake Adjust block “Resistor Ohms” and
“Resistor Watts” parameters.
7. Enable the control (J2-8 connect to J3-24).
WARNING: The motor shaft will rotate during this procedure. Be certain that unexpected motor shaft
movement will not cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
8. Select Quick Setup from the main Keypad menu. Perform each step including auto tune.
9. Remove all power from the control.
10. Couple the motor to its load.
11. Verify freedom of motion of motor shaft.
12. Verify the motor coupling is tight without backlash.
13. Verify the holding brakes if any, are properly adjusted to fully release and set to the desired torque
value.
14. Turn power on. Be sure no errors are displayed.
15. Run the drive from the keypad using one of the following: the arrow keys for direct speed control, a
keypad entered speed or the JOG mode.
16. Select and program additional parameters to suit your application.
The control is now ready for use the in keypad mode. If a different operating mode is desired, refer to Section 3
Operating Modes and Section 4 Programming and Operation.

MN740 Quick Start Guide 1‐1


Figure 1‐1 Minimum Connection Diagram
Minimum Signal Connections

J3

21 Terminals 21 to 30 (J3)
21 External User +24V Return
USB Port 22 External User +24V
J2
Terminals 8 to 20 (J2) 23 Internal +24V
8 8 Enable Input 24 Internal +24V Return
9 Digital Input #1 25 Relay Out 1 NC
J1
10 Digital Input #2 26 Relay Out 1 COM
1 11 Digital Input #3 27 Relay Out 1 NO
Terminals 1 to 7 (J1) 12 Digital Input #4 28 Relay Out 2 NC
1 User Analog Return 13 Digital Input #5 29 Relay Out 2 COM
2 Analog Input #1 14 Digital Input #6 30 Relay Out 2 NO
3 Analog Ref. Power 15 Digital Input #7
4 Analog Input #2 + 16 Digital Input #8
5 Analog Input #2 - 17 Digital Out #1+ (Collector)
6 Analog Output #1 18 Digital Out #1- (Emitter)
7 Analog Output #2 19 Digital Out #2+ (Collector)
For keypad operation, only Enable (J2-8) is required. 20 Digital Out #2- (Emitter)

AC Power & Motor Connections


Note:
Size AA Enclosure The control enable input must be active to allow opera‐
Motor Leads Motor Thermal Leads * tion. Therefore, J2-8 Enable is connected by a factory
L1 L2 L3 GND
R1/B+
R2 B- T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GN
installed jumper to J3-24. This uses the Internal sup‐
ply and provides an active low at J2-8.
D
Fuses
Motor
Input AC Chassis
Power Ground
DB Resistor
(Internal)
Earth Ground

T1
T2
T3
Motor TH1
TH2 * Remove TH1 to TH2 jumper if
G
Motor Thermal Leads are connected.
GND
Size B or C Enclosure Motor Leads Motor Thermal Leads *
R1/B+
L1 L2 L3 R2 B- T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GND

Earth Ground

Input AC
Power DB Resistor
(Internal)
Fuses

T1
T2
T3
Motor TH1
TH2
G See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 6.
GND

1‐2 Quick Start Guide MN740


Section 2
General Information

CE Compliance A custom unit may be required, contact Baldor. Compliance to Directive 89/336/EEC is the responsibility of the
system integrator. A control, motor and all system components must have proper shielding grounding and
filtering as described in MN1383. Please refer to MN1383 for installation techniques for CE compliance.
Overview The Baldor H2 control is a PWM inverter motor control . The control converts AC line power to fixed DC power.
The DC power is then pulse width modulated into synthesized three‐phase AC line voltage for the motor. In this
way, the control converts the fixed input frequency to variable output frequency to cause the motor to have
variable speed operation. Encoderless Vector control operation is also allowed.
The control's rated output power is based on the use of a NEMA design B four pole motor and 60Hz operation at
nominal rated input voltage. If any other type of motor is used, the control should be sized to the motor using the
rated current of the motor.
The control may be used in various applications. It may be programmed by the user to operate in four different
operating zones; standard or quiet and constant torque or variable torque. It can also be configured to operate in
a number of modes depending upon the application requirements and user preference.
It is the responsibility of the user to determine the optimum operating zone and mode to interface the control to
the application. These choices are made with the keypad as explained in Section 4 of this manual.

MN740 General Information 2‐1


Limited Warranty

For a period of two (2) years from the date of original purchase, BALDOR will
repair or replace without charge controls and accessories which our
examination proves to be defective in material or workmanship. This
warranty is valid if the unit has not been tampered with by unauthorized
persons, misused, abused, or improperly installed and has been used in
accordance with the instructions and/or ratings supplied. This warranty is in
lieu of any other warranty or guarantee expressed or implied. BALDOR
shall not be held responsible for any expense (including installation and
removal), inconvenience, or consequential damage, including injury to any
person or property caused by items of our manufacture or sale. (Some
states do not allow exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above exclusion may not apply.) In any event, BALDOR's
total liability, under all circumstances, shall not exceed the full purchase
price of the control. Claims for purchase price refunds, repairs, or
replacements must be referred to BALDOR with all pertinent data as to the
defect, the date purchased, the task performed by the control, and the
problem encountered. No liability is assumed for expendable items such as
fuses.

Goods may be returned only with written notification including a BALDOR


Return Authorization Number and any return shipments must be prepaid.

2‐2 General Information MN740


Safety Notice This equipment contains voltages that may be as high as 1000 volts! Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal
injury. Only qualified personnel should attempt the start-up procedure or troubleshoot this equipment.
This equipment may be connected to other machines that have rotating parts or parts that are driven by this
equipment. Improper use can cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel should attempt the start-up
procedure or troubleshoot this equipment.
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not touch any circuit board, power device or electrical connection before you first
ensure that power has been disconnected and there is no high voltage present from this
equipment or other equipment to which it is connected. Electrical shock can cause
serious or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel should attempt the start-up procedure or
troubleshoot this equipment.
WARNING: Be sure that you are completely familiar with the safe operation of this equipment. This
equipment may be connected to other machines that have rotating parts or parts that are
controlled by this equipment. Improper use can cause serious or fatal injury. Only
qualified personnel should attempt the start-up procedure or troubleshoot this equipment.
WARNING: Do not use motor overload relays with an automatic reset feature. These are dangerous
since the process may injure someone if a sudden or unexpected automatic restart
occurs. If manual reset relays are not available, disable the automatic restart feature using
external control wiring.
WARNING: This unit has an automatic restart feature that will start the motor whenever input power is
applied and a RUN (FWD or REV) command is issued. If an automatic restart of the motor
could cause injury to personnel, the automatic restart feature should be disabled by
changing the Level 2 Miscellaneous block, Auto Restart parameter to Manual.
WARNING: Be sure the system is properly grounded before applying power. Do not apply AC power
before you ensure that all grounding instructions have been followed. Electrical shock
can cause serious or fatal injury.
WARNING: Do not remove cover for at least five (5) minutes after AC power is disconnected to allow
capacitors to discharge. Dangerous voltages are present inside the equipment. Electrical
shock can cause serious or fatal injury.
WARNING: Improper operation of control may cause violent motion of the motor shaft and driven
equipment. Be certain that unexpected motor shaft movement will not cause injury to
personnel or damage to equipment. Certain failure modes of the control can produce peak
torque of several times the rated motor torque.
WARNING: Motor circuit may have high voltage present whenever AC power is applied, even when
motor is not rotating. Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury.
WARNING: Dynamic brake resistors may generate enough heat to ignite combustible materials. Keep
all combustible materials and flammable vapors away from brake resistors.
WARNING: The motor shaft will rotate during the autotune procedure. Be certain that unexpected
motor shaft movement will not cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment.

Continued on next page

MN740 General Information 2‐3


Caution: Disconnect motor leads (T1, T2 and T3) from control before you perform a “Megger” test
on the motor. Failure to disconnect motor from the control will result in extensive damage
to the control. The control is tested at the factory for high voltage / leakage resistance as
part of Underwriter Laboratory requirements.
Caution: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the RMS symmetrical
short circuit amperes listed here at rated voltage.
Horsepower RMS Symmetrical Amperes
1-50 5,000
51-200 10,000
201-400 18,000
401-600 30,000
601-900 42,000
Caution: Do not connect AC power to the Motor terminals T1, T2 and T3. Connecting AC power to
these terminals may result in damage to the control.
Caution: Baldor recommends not to use “Grounded Leg Delta” transformer power leads that may
create ground loops. Instead, we recommend using a four wire Wye.
Caution: Do not supply any power to the External Trip (motor thermostat) leads at TH1 and TH2.
Power on these leads can damage the control. Use a dry contact type that requires no
external power to operate.
Caution: If the DB hardware mounting is in any position other than vertical, the DB hardware must
be derated by 35% of its rated capacity.
Caution: Before external Dynamic Brake Hardware is added, the internal resistor must be
disconnected. Remove the resistor from the B+/R1 and R2 terminals. The external
resistor can be connected across these terminals. Failure to remove the internal resistor
will decrease the total resistance (parallel connection) and cause damage.
Caution: Do not set Level 2, Drive Configure, Power Input parameter to Common Bus if AC power is
connected to L1, L2 or L3. Common Bus requires numerous changes, contact Baldor for
information.
Caution: Only Baldor cables should be used to connect the keypad and control. These are special
twisted pair cables to protect the control and keypad. Damage associated with other cable
types are not covered by the Baldor warranty.
Caution: If an M-Contactor is installed, the control must be disabled for at least 200msec before the
M-Contactor is opened. If the M-Contactor is opened while the control is supplying
voltage and current to the motor, the control may be damaged. Before the control is
enabled, the M-Contactor must be closed for at least 200msec.

2‐4 General Information MN740


Section 3
Receiving & Installation

Receiving & Inspection


When you receive your control, there are several things you should do immediately.
1. Observe the condition of the shipping container and report any damage immediately to the
commercial carrier that delivered your control.
2. Remove the control from the shipping container and remove all packing materials from the control.
The container and packing materials may be retained for future shipment.
3. Verify that the part number of the control you received is the same as the part number listed on your
purchase order.
4. Inspect the control for external physical damage that may have been sustained during shipment and
report any damage immediately to the commercial carrier that delivered your control.
5. If the control is to be stored for several weeks before use, be sure that it is stored in a location that
conforms to published storage humidity and temperature specifications stated in this manual.
Location and Mounting
The control should be installed in an area that is protected from direct sunlight, corrosives, harmful gases or
liquids, dust, metallic particles, and vibration. Exposure to these can reduce the operating life and degrade
performance of the control.
Several other factors should be carefully evaluated when selecting a location for installation:
1. To maintain compliance with European Electrical Safety Standard VDE0160(1994)/EN50178 (1998)
the control must be mounted inside an enclosure that requires a tool for opening.
2. For effective cooling and maintenance, mount the drive vertically on a solid, flat, non-flammable,
vertical surface. See Dimensions in Section 6 of this manual.
3. Be sure to provide proper top, bottom and side clearance (2” minimum each side).
4. Securely fasten the control to the mounting surface at the mounting holes.
Shock Mounting
If the control will be subjected to levels of shock greater than 1G or vibration greater than 0.5G at 10
to 60Hz, the control should be shock mounted.
5. Operating Altitude derating. Up to 3300 feet (1000 meters) no derating required. Derate the
continuous and peak output current by 2% for each 330 feet (100 meters) above 3300 feet. Maximum
operating altitude 16,500 feet (5,000 meters).
6. Operating Temperature derating. -10°C to 45°C ambient. 45°C maximum, no derating. Derate the
continuous and peak output current by 3% for each degree above 45°C to 55°C maximum ambient.
Table 3‐1 Watts Loss Ratings

Enclosure 240VAC 480VAC 600VAC


Size 2.5kHz PWM 8.0kHz PWM 2.5kHz PWM 8.0kHz PWM 2.5kHz PWM 8.0kHz PWM
AA, B and 50Watts + 50Watts + 50Watts + 50Watts + 50Watts + 50Watts +
C (14 W/ Amp) (17 W/ Amp) (17 W/ Amp) (26 W/ Amp) (18 W/ Amp) (28 W/ Amp)

Example:
At 2.5kHz, a 3hp, 240VAC control draws 10Amps. Watts loss = 50W + (10x14) = 190Watts

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐1


Cover Removal Size AA, B and C
To connect power and signal wires, the cover must be removed. This procedure describes how to access all
terminal connections inside the control.
1. Remove the four cover screws shown in Figure 3‐1.
2. Lift and remove the cover.
3. Press in the two Cover Releases (Control) and rotate the control cover open as shown.
Figure 3‐1 Size AA, B and C Cover Removal
Lift and
remove cover Control
Cover

Cover Cover
Screws (4) Release

Cover
Release

Cover
Control

I/O Module Slot1 I/O Module


Shield Slot2
Shield Plate
Screws (4) Feedback
Module Slot3

Power Base

Power & Motor Analog/Digital


Connections I/O Terminals

Cable Entrance

Keypad Connector The keypad connector referenced in Figure 3‐2 and Table 3‐2 is an RJ-11 type wired as half duplex RS485.
Twisted pair wire must be used to connect the keypad and control for remote mounting of the keypad.
Caution: Only Baldor cables should be used to connect the keypad and control. These are special
twisted pair cables to protect the control and keypad. Damage associated with other cable
types are not covered by the Baldor warranty.
Figure 3‐2

6
5
4
3
2
1
RJ-1 1
Connection, either end
with clip on bottom

3‐2 Receiving & Installation MN740


Table 3‐2 Cable Connections
Pin Signal Name Description
1 A RS485 Line A
2 B RS485 Line B
3 KP_PS_GND Power Supply Return
4 +8V Power Supply +
5 KP_PS_GND Power Supply Return
6 +8V Power Supply +

Optional Remote Keypad Installation


The keypad may be remotely mounted using optional Baldor keypad extension cable (refer to Appendix A).
When the keypad is properly mounted to a NEMA Type 4X enclosure, it retains the Type 4X rating.
The Mounting/Drill Template is located in Appendix D of this manual.

Caution: Only Baldor cables should be used to connect the keypad and control. These are special
twisted pair cables to protect the control and keypad. Damage associated with other cable
types are not covered by the Baldor warranty.

Tools Required:
• Center punch, tap handle, screwdrivers (Phillips and straight).
• #27 drill bit.
• 1‐3/8″ standard knockout punch.
• RTV sealant.
• (3) 6-32x3/8” screws
• (3) #6 Flat Washers

Mounting Instructions: For clearance mounting holes


1. Locate a flat 4″ wide x 5.5″ minimum high mounting surface. Material should be sufficient thickness
(14 gauge minimum).
2. Place the template on the mounting surface or mark the holes as shown on the template.
3. Accurately center punch the 3 mounting holes and the large knockout.
4. Drill three #27 clearance holes.
5. Locate the 1‐3/8″ knockout center and punch using the manufacturers instructions.
6. Debur knockout and mounting holes making sure the panel stays clean and flat.
7. Apply RTV to the three #27 clearance holes.
8. Assemble the keypad to the panel. Use 6‐32 screws and flat washers.
9. From the inside of the panel, apply RTV over each of the three mounting screws and nuts. Cover a
3/ ″ area around each screw making sure to completely encapsulate the screw head and washer.
4
10. Refer to Appendix A for selection of cables designed to be used for remote mounting of keypad. Be
sure that only Baldor cables are used. Route the keypad cable into the control and connect to P2 of
the control board, Figure 3‐3.

Figure 3‐3 Connector Locations


RS485
See recommended tightening torques in Section 6.

REGEN Ribbon
Keypad S G A B S
Connector Cable 1 JP3
J7 J8 Connector P3

Control
Circuit Board P2

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐3


Power Conditioning
System Grounding Baldor recommends not using “Grounded Leg Delta” transformer power leads that may create
ground loops. Instead, we recommend using a four wire Wye. Baldor Controls are designed to be
powered from standard three phase lines that are electrically symmetrical with respect to ground.
System grounding is an important step in the overall installation to prevent problems. The
recommended grounding method is shown in Figure 3‐4.
Figure 3‐4 Recommended System Grounding
See recommended tightening torques in Control
Section 6.
Note:Wiring shown for clarity of grounding
Note:A line reactor is recommended method only. Not representative of
and must be purchased separately. actual terminal block location.
L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3
Note:A load reactor is recommended
L1 and must be purchased separately.
AC Main
Supply Optional Optional
L2 Line Load
Reactor Reactor
L3

Earth
Safety
Ground Four Wire
“Wye”
Driven Earth Route all 4 wires L1, L2, L3 and Earth (Ground)
Ground Rod together in conduit or cable.
(Plant Ground)
Route all 4 wires T1, T2, T3 and Motor Ground Ground per NEC and
together in conduit or cable. Local codes.
Connect all wires (including motor ground)
inside the motor terminal box.

Ungrounded Distribution System


With an ungrounded power distribution system it is possible to have a continuous current path to ground through
the MOV devices. To avoid equipment damage, an isolation transformer with a WYE grounded secondary is
recommended. This provides three phase AC power that is symmetrical with respect to ground.
Input Power Conditioning
Baldor controls are designed for direct connection to standard three phase lines that are electrically symmetrical
with respect to ground. An AC line reactor or an isolation transformer may be required for some power
conditions.
 If the feeder or branch circuit that provides power to the control has permanently connected power
factor correction capacitors, an input AC line reactor or an isolation transformer must be connected
between the power factor correction capacitors and the control.
 If the feeder or branch circuit that provides power to the control has power factor correction capacitors
that are switched on line and off line, the capacitors must not be switched while the control is
connected to the AC power line. If the capacitors are switched on line while the control is still
connected to the AC power line, additional protection is required. TVSS (Transient Voltage Surge
Suppressor) of the proper rating must be installed between the AC line reactor or an isolation
transformer and the AC input to the control.

3‐4 Receiving & Installation MN740


Line Impedance The Baldor H2 controls require 1% line impedance minimum. If the impedance of the incoming power does not meet
this requirement, a 3 phase line reactor can be used to provide the needed impedance in most cases.
The input impedance of the power lines can be determined as follows:
Measure the line to line voltage at no load and at full rated load.
Use these measured values to calculate impedance as follows:
(Volts NoLoad * Volts FullLoad)
%Impedance +   100
(Volts NoLoad)

Line Reactors Three phase line reactors are available from Baldor. The line reactor to order is based on the full load current of
the motor (FLA). If providing your own line reactor, use the following formula to calculate the minimum
inductance required.
(V  0.01)
L + L*L
(I Ǹ3 377)
Where: L Minimum inductance in Henries.
VL‐L Input volts measured line to line.
0.01 Desired percentage of input impedance 1%.
I Input current rating of control.
377 Constant used with 60Hz power.
Use 314 if input power is 50Hz.

Load Reactors Line reactors may be used at the control output to the motor. When used this way, they are called Load
Reactors. Load reactors serve several functions that include:
 Protect the control from a short circuit at the motor.
 Limit the rate of rise of motor surge currents.
 Slowing the rate of change of power the control delivers to the motor.
Load reactors should be installed as close to the control as possible. Selection should be based on the motor
nameplate FLA value.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐5


Power Disconnect A power disconnect should be installed between the input power service and the control for a fail safe
method to disconnect power. The control will remain in a powered‐up condition until all input power is removed
from the control and the internal bus voltage is depleted.
Protective Devices Recommended fuse sizes are based on the following:
115% of maximum continuous current for time delay.
150% of maximum continuous current for Fast or Very Fast action.
Note: These recommendations do not consider harmonic currents or ambient temperatures greater than 45°C.
Be sure a suitable input power protection device is installed. Use the recommended fuses and wire sizes shown
in Table 3‐4 is based on the use of copper conductor wire rated at 75 °C. The table is specified for NEMA B
motors.
Fast Action Fuses: 240VAC, Buss® KTN
480VAC, Buss® KTS to 600A (KTU for 601 to 1200A)
600VAC, Buss® KTS to 600A (KTU for 601 to 1200A)
Very Fast Action: 240VAC, Buss® JJN
480VAC, Buss® JJS
600VAC, Buss® JJS
Semiconductor 240VAC, Ferraz Shawmut A50QS
Fuses: 480VAC, Ferraz Shawmut A70QS
600VAC, Ferraz Shawmut A70QS
Buss® is a trademarks of Cooper Industries, Inc.
Reduced Input Voltage Derating Power ratings are for nominal AC input voltages (240 or 480VAC). The power rating of
the control must be reduced when operating at a reduced input voltage. The amount of reduction is the ratio of
the voltage change.
Examples:
A 5hp, 240VAC control operating at 208VAC has an effective power rating of 4.33hp.
5hp  208VAC + 4.33hp
240VAC
Likewise, a 3hp, 480VAC control operating at 380VAC has an effective power rating of 2.37hp.
3hp  380VAC + 2.37hp
480VAC
Electrical Installation All interconnection wires between the control, AC power source, motor, host control and any operator
interface stations should be in metal conduits or shielded cable must be used. Use listed closed loop connectors
that are of appropriate size for wire gauge being used. Connectors are to be installed using crimp tool specified
by the manufacturer of the connector. Only class 1 wiring should be used.
Table 3‐3 Cable Entrance Hole Sizes
Hole Sizes Provided
Control Size
American NPT Size Metric Size
AA 1/2 (22.8mm) M20, PG16
B 1/2 (22.8mm) M20, PG16
C 1/2 (22.8mm) M20, PG16
3/4 (28.6mm) M25, PG21

Optional Filter/Reactor Figure 3‐5 shows the connections for installing an optional Line Filter and AC Reactor.
Figure 3‐5 Filter and Reactor Connections
L1 Filter L1 L1
AC L2 L2 L2
Reactor Control
Line L3 L3 L3
PE PE PE
Line Load

3‐6 Receiving & Installation MN740


Table 3‐4 240VAC Three Phase Wire Size
Control Rating Input Fuse (Amps) Wire Gauge
Input Amps HP Fast Acting (UL) Fast Acting (CUL) Semiconductor (CUL) AWG mm2
4.2 1 6 6 14 2.5
7.0 2 12 12 14 2.5
10 3 15 15 14 2.5
16 5 25 25 12 4.0
22 7.5 35 35 10 6.0
53 20 80 *80 A50QS80-4 6 16.0
66 25 110 *110 A50QS125-4 4 25.0
78 30 125 *125 A50QS150-4 3 35.0
102 40 175 *175 A50QS150-4 1 50.0
130 50 200 200 1 50
154 60 250 250 2/0 70
Table 3‐5 480VAC Three Phase Wire Size
Control Rating Input Fuse (Amps) Wire Gauge
Input Amps HP Fast Acting (UL) Fast Acting (CUL) Semiconductor (CUL) AWG mm2
2.1 1 3 3 14 2.5
3.4 2 6 6 14 2.5
4.8 3 8 8 14 2.5
7.6 5 12 12 14 2.5
11 7.5 17.5 17.5 14 2.5
14 10 25 25 12 4.0
21 15 40 40 8 10.0
27 20 50 50 8 10.0
34 25 60 *60 8 10.0
39 30 60 *60 A70QS60-4 8 10.0
51 40 80 *80 A70QS80-4 6 16.0
64 50 100 *100 A70QS100-4 4 25.0
96 60 125 125 4 25.0
124 75 150 150 3 35.0
156 100 200 200 1 50.0
156 125 250 250 2/0 70.0
Table 3‐6 600VAC Three Phase Wire Size
Control Rating Input Fuse (Amps) Wire Gauge
Input Amps HP Fast Acting (UL) Fast Acting (CUL) Semiconductor (CUL) AWG mm2
1.7 1 4 4 14 2.5
2.7 2 6 6 14 2.5
3.9 3 10 10 14 2.5
6.1 5 15 15 14 2.5
9.0 7.5 17.5 17.5 14 2.5
11 10 20 20 14 2.5
26.5 25 40 *40 A70QS40-4 10 6.0
30 30 50 *50 A70QS50-4 8 10.0
40 40 70 *70 A70QS70-4 6 16.0
51 50 80 *80 A70QS80-4 6 16.0
62 60 100 100 6 16.0
77 75 125 125 4 25.0
99 100 150 150 3 35.0
125 125 200 200 1 50.0
*Requires custom drive for CUL application using fast fuses.
Note: All wire sizes are based on 75°C copper wire. Recommended fuses are based on 45°C ambient,
maximum continuous control output current and no harmonic current.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐7


3 Phase Power and Motor Connections
Figure 3‐6 shows the minimum connections required at the power connector. All cables must be shielded and
the shields must be grounded at the cable entrance. The brake resistor and cable must be shielded if installed
outside the enclosure.
Figure 3‐6 3 Phase Power Connections
Size AA Enclosure Size B or C Enclosure

L1 L2 L3 GND R2 B- T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GND Motor L1 L2 L3 R2 B- T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GND


R1/B+ Chassis R1/B+
Ground
Input AC Power
Leads
Dynamic Brake

Input AC Power
Motor Leads

Motor Thermal

Dynamic Brake

Leads *
Motor Thermal
Motor Leads
Motor GND
Motor GND * Remove TH1 to TH2 jumper if
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 6. Motor Thermal Leads are connected.
1. Access the Power and Motor Terminals (see Cover Removal procedure).
2. Feed the power supply and motor cables into the drive through the cable entrance.
3. Connect the line L1, L2, L3 and GND to the power terminal connectors, Figure 3‐7.
4. Connect motor leads to T1, T2, T3 and GND motor terminal connectors.
Figure 3‐7 3 Phase Power Connections
L1 L2 L3 Earth

* Optional components not provided with control.


Note 1 *Fuses

Notes:
Note 3
1. See “Protective Devices” described previously in this section.
A1 B1 C1
2. Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L1, L2 and L3.
3. Metal conduit should be used. Connect conduits so the use of a *Optional
Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding. Note 4 Line
4. See Line/Load Reactors described previously in this section. Reactor
Line Reactors are built-in for size B and C controls. A2 B2 C2 Note 2
Note 3
L1 L2 L3 GND

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 6.


Baldor
Control

3‐8 Receiving & Installation MN740


Section 1
General Information

Operating a Three Phase Control on Single Phase Input Power


Single phase AC input power can be used to power the control instead of three phase for control sizes AA, B and
C. The specifications and control sizes are listed in Section 6 of this manual. If single phase power is to be
used, the rated Horsepower of the control may have to be reduced (derated). In addition, power wiring and
jumper changes are required. Both connection types are shown in Figures 3‐8 and 3‐9.
Single phase rating wire size and protection devices are listed in Tables 3‐7 and 3‐8.
Single Phase Power Derating: Single phase power derating requires that the continuous and peak current ratings of the
control be reduced by the following percentages:
1. 1‐7.5 hp 240 and 480VAC controls:
Derate output hp to the next lower hp value (ie 7.5hp becomes 5hp etc.)
2. 10‐50 hp 240 and 480VAC controls:
Derate output hp by 50% of the nameplate rating.

Table 3‐7 Single Phase Wire Size and Protection Devices ‐ 240 VAC Controls
Control Rating Input Fuse (Amps) Wire Gauge
Input Amps HP Fast Acting (UL) Fast Acting (CUL) Semiconductor (CUL) AWG mm2
8.0 1 12 12 14 2.5
10 2 15 20 14 2.5
15 3 25 25 12 4.0
28 5 45 45 10 6.0
40 7.5
50 10
68 15
88 20 150 *150 A50QS150-4 3 35.0
110 25 175 *175 A50QS175-4 2 35.0
136 30 200 *200 A50QS200-4 1/0 50.0
176 40
216 50
*Requires custom drive for CUL application using fast fuses.
Note: All wire sizes are based on 75°C copper wire. Recommended fuses are based on 45°C ambient, maximum continuous
control output current and no harmonic current.

Table 3‐8 Single Phase Wire Size and Protection Devices ‐ 480 VAC Controls
Control Rating Input Fuse (Amps) Wire Gauge
Input Amps HP Fast Acting (UL) Fast Acting (CUL) Semiconductor (CUL) AWG mm2
4.0 1 6 6 14 2.5
6.0 2 10 10 14 2.5
8.5 3 15 15 14 2.5
14 5 20 20 12 4.0
20 7.5 30 30 10 6.0
25 10 40 40 8 10.0
34 15 50 50 8 10.0
44 20 60 60 8 10.0
55 25 80 *80 A70QS80-4 6 16.0
68 30 100 *100 A70QS100-4 4 25.0
88 40 150 *150 A70QS150-4 3 35.0
108 50
*Requires custom drive for CUL application using fast fuses.
Note: All wire sizes are based on 75°C copper wire. Recommended fuses are based on 45°C ambient, maximum continuous
control output current and no harmonic current.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐9


Figure 3‐8 Size AA Single Phase Power Connections To a 3 Phase Control
Single phase 3 wire Connections Single phase 2 Wire Connections

L1 L2 L1 Neutral
Earth Earth

Note 1 *Fuse
*Fuses
Set Level 2, Drive Configure, Power
Input p#2110 to 0-Single to avoid “Loss
Note 3 of Phase” trips during single phase
A1 operation.
A1 B1
*Optional
*Optional Note 2
Note 4 Line
Line Reactor
Reactor
A2
A2 B2
Note 3

L1 L2 L3 GND L1 L2 L3 GND

Baldor Baldor
Control Control
Notes:
* Optional components not provided with
size AA control.
1. See “Protective Devices” described previously in this section.
2. Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L1 and L2.
3. Metal conduit should be used. Connect conduits so the use of a
Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.
4. See Line/Load Reactors described previously in this section.
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 6. Line Reactors are built-in for size B and C controls.

Figure 3‐9 Size B and C Single Phase Power Connections To a 3 Phase Control
Single phase 3 wire Connections Single phase 2 Wire Connections

L1 L2 L1 Neutral
Earth Earth

Note 1 *Fuse
*Fuses
Set Level 2, Drive Configure, Power
Input p#2110 to 0-Single to avoid “Loss
Note 3 of Phase” trips during single phase
A1 operation.
A1 B1
*Optional
*Optional Note 2
Note 4 Line
Line Reactor
Reactor
A2
A2 B2 IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT:
Note 3 Do not connect L3. Do not connect L3.

L1 L2 L3 GND L1 L2 L3 GND

Baldor Baldor
Control Control
Notes:
* Optional components not provided with control.
1. See “Protective Devices” described previously in this section.
2. Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L1 and L2.
3. Metal conduit should be used. Connect conduits so the use of a
Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.
4. See Line/Load Reactors described previously in this section.
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 6. Line Reactors are built-in for size B and C controls.

3‐10 Receiving & Installation MN740


Single Phase Power and Motor Connections IHH6XX-XX
Figure 3‐10 shows the minimum connections required at the power connector. All cables must be shielded and
the shields must be grounded at the cable entrance. The brake resistor and cable must be shielded if installed
outside the enclosure.
Figure 3‐10 Single Phase Control Power Terminals
Size AA Enclosure

L1 L2 N GND R2 B- T1 T2 T3 TH1 TH2 GND Motor


R1/B+
Chassis
Ground
Input AC Power

Dynamic Brake

Leads *
Motor Leads

Motor Thermal

Motor GND
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 6.

Motor GND
* Remove TH1 to TH2 jumper if
Motor Thermal Leads are connected.
1. Access the Power and Motor Terminals (see Cover Removal procedure).
2. Feed the power supply and motor cables into the drive through the cable entrance.
3. Connect the line L1, L2, N and GND to the power terminal connectors, Figure 3‐10.
4. Connect motor leads to T1, T2, T3 and GND motor terminal connectors.
Figure 3‐11 Single Phase Control Power Connections
120VAC Single Phase 240VAC Single Phase
L1 N Earth L1 L2 Earth

Note 1 *Fuses Note 1 *Fuses

Note 3 Note 3
A1 A1 B1

*Optional *Optional
Note 4 Line Note 4 Line
Reactor Reactor
A2 Note 2 A2 B2 Note 2
Note 3 Note 3
L1 L2 N GND L1 L2 N GND
* Optional components not provided
with control.
Baldor Baldor
Notes: Control Control
1. See Table 3‐9.
2. Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L1, L2 and N.
3. Metal conduit should be used. Connect conduits so the use of a See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 6.
Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.
4. See Line/Load Reactors described previously in this section.
Line Reactors are built-in for size B and C controls.

Table 3‐9 Single Phase Rating Wire Size and Protection Devices ‐ 240 VAC Controls
120VAC Single Phase Input 240VAC Single Phase Input
HP Input Fuse (Amps) Input Fuse (Amps)
Input Amps AWG mm2 Input Amps AWG mm2
Fast Acting Fast Acting
1 12 20 12 4.0 6.3 12 14 2.5
2 20 30 10 6.0 10.2 20 14 2.5
3 30 35 10 6.0 14.4 25 12 4.0
Note: All wire sizes are based on 75°C copper wire. Recommended fuses are based on 45°C ambient, maximum continuous
control output current and no harmonic current.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐11


M-Contactor If required by local codes or for safety reasons, an M‐Contactor (motor circuit contactor) may be installed.
However, incorrect installation or failure of the M‐contactor or wiring may damage the control. If an M‐Contactor
is installed, the control must be disabled for at least 200msec before the M‐Contactor is opened or the control
may be damaged. M‐Contactor connections are shown in Figure 3‐12.
Caution: If an M-Contactor is installed, the control must be disabled for at least 200msec before the
M-Contactor is opened. If the M-Contactor is opened while the control is supplying
voltage and current to the motor, the control may be damaged. Before the control is
enabled, the M-Contactor must be closed for at least 200msec.

Figure 3‐12 Motor Connections and Optional Connections


* Optional components not provided with control.

Baldor
Control Notes:
1. Metal conduit should be used. Connect conduits so the use of
T1 T2 T3 GND Load Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.
2. See Line/Load Reactors described previously in this section.
3. Use same gauge wire for ground as for T1, T2 and T3.
M

Note 1
A1 B1 C1
* Optional “M” Contactor Connections
Note 2 *Optional
Load * Optional
Reactor To Power Source * M‐Contactor RC Device
(Rated Coil Voltage) M Electrocube
A2 B2 C2
RG1781‐3
Note 1 * J2
M Enable
Note 3
T2 T3 8
See Recommended Tightening 9
Torques in Section 6. T1 G
M=Contacts of optional M‐Contactor
* AC Motor

Long Motor Leads


The wire leads that connect the motor to the control are critical in terms of sizing, shielding and the cable
characteristics. Short cable runs are usually trouble free but fault-monitoring circuitry can produce numerous
faults when long cables (over 100 feet) are used.
100+ ft (30m). Baldor recommends adding an optional load reactor to the output of the control.
250+ ft (75m). Baldor recommends adding an optional load reactor and common mode choke to the control.
The load reactor and/or common mode choke should be placed in close physical proximity to the control.
Unexpected faults may occur due to excessive charging current required for motor cable capacitance.
If you use long motor leads and experience unexpected trips due to current overload conditions and are not sure
how to correctly size and connect the optional load reactors, please contact your Baldor representative. Baldor is
always glad to assist.

3‐12 Receiving & Installation MN740


Optional Dynamic Brake Hardware
Size AA, B and C controls, refer to Figure 3‐13 for DB resistor connections.
Dynamic Brake (DB) Hardware must be installed on a flat, non‐flammable, vertical surface for effective cooling
and operation.
Caution: Before external Dynamic Brake Hardware is added, the internal resistor must be
disconnected. Remove the resistor (wires) from the B+/R1 and R2 terminals. The external
resistor can be connected across these terminals. Failure to remove the internal resistor
will decrease the total resistance (parallel connection) and cause damage.
Electrical Installation Connections for DB hardware are determined by the Control model number suffix (E or EO).
Figure 3‐13 DB Terminal Identification
“E” or “W” suffix C Size Only - Disconnect internal DB resistor wires
from DBR1 and DBR2 terminals before connecting external DB Resistor to
prevent damage.
R1/B+ R2 B‐

DBR1

DBR2
Wires from the Internal Dynamic Brake resistor for size AA & B controls
must be removed before external resistor hardware is installed.
External TB101

See recommended Terminal Tightening Torques in Section 6. R1/B+ R2 B‐


Note:Although not shown, metal conduit should be used
to shield all power wires and motor leads.
External

External Trip Input Terminal J2‐16 is available for connection to a normally closed contact. The contact should be a dry contact type
with no power available from the contact. When the contact opens (activated), the control will automatically shut
down and give an External Trip fault.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐13


Control Board Connections
The analog and digital inputs and output terminals are shown in Figure 3‐14. The signals are described in
Tables 3‐10, 3‐11 and 3‐12. Connections will depend upon which of the operating modes are chosen.
Each mode is described and a connection diagram is provided later in this section.
Figure 3‐14 Control I/O Connections
See recommended tightening torques in
Section 6.
Connector
USB Activity LED
J3
Heartbeat/Fault 1
LED 21
Board
USB Port Plug
J2 1
8 Terminals 8 to 20 (J2)
J1 8 Enable Input
1 9 Digital Input 1
10 Digital Input 2 Terminals 21 to 30 (J3)
11 Digital Input 3 21 External User +24V Return
12 Digital Input 4 22 External User +24V
Terminals 1 to 7 (J1) 13 Digital Input 5 23 Internal +24V
1 User Analog Return 14 Digital Input 6 24 Internal +24V Return
2 Analog Input 1 15 Digital Input 7 25 Relay Out 1 NC
3 Analog Ref. Power 16 Digital Input 8 26 Relay Out 1 COM
4 Analog Input 2 + 17 Digital Out 1 + (Collector) 27 Relay Out 1 NO
5 Analog Input 2 - 18 Digital Out 1 - (Emitter) 28 Relay Out 2 NC
6 Analog Output 1 19 Digital Out 2 + (Collector) 29 Relay Out 2 COM
7 Analog Output 2 20 Digital Out 2 - (Emitter) 30 Relay Out 2 NO

Table 3‐10 J1 Connector Definition


Connector Signal Description
Terminal
J1-1 0VDC - Common reference for Analog Inputs and outputs.
J1-2 AIN1 - Analog Input 1.
J1-3 AREF - Analog reference power (+10V for Analog Input 1).
J1-4 AIN2+ - Analog Input 2+.
J1-5 AIN2- - Analog Input 2-.
J1-6 AOUT1 - Analog output 1.
J1-7 AOUT2 - Analog output 2.
Table 3‐11 J2 Connector Definition
Connector
Terminal Signal Description
J2-8 Enable Input
J2-9 DIN1 - Digital input 1.
J2-10 DIN2 - Digital input 2.
J2-1 1 DIN3 - Digital input 3.
J2-12 DIN4 - Digital input 4.
J2-13 DIN5 - Digital input 5.
J2-14 DIN6 - Digital input 6.
J2-15 DIN7 - Digital input 7.
J2-16 DIN8 - Digital input 8.
J2-17 Digital Output #1 + (Collector)
J2-18 Digital Output #1 - (Emitter)
J2-19 Digital Output #2 + (Collector)
J2-20 Digital Output #2 - (Emitter)

3‐14 Receiving & Installation MN740


Table 3‐12 J3 Connector Definition
Connector
Terminal Signal Description
J3-21 External User +24V Return
J3-22 External User +24V
J3-23 Internal +24VDC
J3-24 Internal +24VDC Return
J3-25 Relay Output #1 N.C.
J3-26 Relay Output #1 COMMON
J3-27 Relay Output #1 N.O.
J3-28 Relay Output #2 N.C.
J3-29 Relay Output #2 COMMON
J3-30 Relay Output #2 N.O.

Analog Inputs Two analog inputs are available: Analog Input 1 (J1‐1 and J1‐2) and Analog Input 2 (J1‐4 and J1‐5) as shown in
Figure 3‐15. Either analog input may be selected in the Level 1 Input block, Command Source parameter.
Figure 3‐15 Analog Inputs
J1

Analog GND
1
Command Pot (10K or Analog Input 1
0‐10VDC 2 Analog Input 1
Pot Reference
3
Analog Input +2
4
±5VDC, ±10VDC, Analog Input 2
Analog Input ‐2
0-20mA or 4‐20 mA Input 5

See recommended terminal tightening torques in Section 6.

Analog Input 1 When using a potentiometer as the speed command, process feedback or setpoint source,
(Single Ended) the potentiometer should be connected at Analog Input 1. When using Analog Input 1, the respective parameter
must be set to “Analog Input 1”.
Note: A potentiometer value of 5k to 10k, 0.5 watt may be used.

Parameter Selection
The single ended Analog Input 1 can be used in one of three ways:
1. Speed or Torque command (Level 1 Input block, Command Source=Analog Input 1).
2. Process Feedback (Level 2 Process Control block, Process Feedback=Analog Input 1).
3. Setpoint Source (Level 2 Process Control block, Setpoint Source=Analog Input 1).
Analog Input 2 Analog Input 2 accepts a differential command ±5VDC, ±10VDC, 0‐20 mA or 4‐20 mA.
(Differential) If pin J1‐4 is positive with respect to pin 5 and P1408=±5V or ±10V, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
If pin J1‐4 is negative with respect to pin 5 and P1408=±5V or ±10V, the motor will rotate in the reverse direction.
If forward direction is not correct, change Level 2, Motor Data Reverse Rotation parameter P2415.
Analog Input 2 can be connected for single ended operation by connecting either of the differential terminals to
common, provided the common mode voltage range is not exceeded.
Analog Input 2 can be set for voltage or current mode operation. With JP1 as shown in Figure 3‐16, Voltage
mode is selected. If JP1 is connected to pins 2 and 3, current mode is selected.
The Level 1 Input Setup Parameter P#1408 can be set to the full scale voltage or current range desired.
Note: The common mode voltage can be measured with a voltmeter. Apply the maximum command voltage to
Analog Input 2 (J1‐4, 5). Measure the AC and DC voltage across J1‐1 to J1‐4. Add the AC and DC
values. Measure the AC and DC voltage from J1‐1 to J1‐5. Add these AC and DC values.

If either of these measurement totals exceeds a total of ±15 volts, then the common mode voltage range
has been exceeded. To correct this condition, isolate the command signal with a signal isolator.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐15


Figure 3‐16 Jumper Locations
See recommended tightening torques in RS485 JP3
Section 6.
120 ohm Termination
1
REGEN Ribbon
Keypad S G A B S
Connector Cable 1 JP3 No Termination
J7 J8 Connector P3 1

P2 Type ANAIN2 ANAOUT1


Control JP6 JP1 JP2
Circuit Board ENP INP
P1 JP1 JP2 Factory Settings Voltage
JP5 as shown 1 1
EPN DFT
Fault 1 1

Current
USB Port USB 8 24
1 1

Note factory connection of


J1 J2 J3 J2-8 (Enable) to J3-24.

Analog Outputs Two programmable analog outputs are provided on J1-6 and J1‐7. These outputs are scaled and can be used
to provide status of various control conditions. The return for these outputs is J1‐1 analog return. Each output
function is programmed in the Level 1 Output block, Analog Out1 Signal or Analog Out2 Signal parameter values.
Analog Output 1 can be set for voltage or current mode operation. With JP2 as shown in Figure 3‐16, Voltage
mode is selected. If JP2 is connected to pins 2 and 3, current mode is selected.
The Level 1 Output Setup Parameter P#1510 can be set to the full scale voltage or current range desired.
Opto Isolated Inputs Logic input connections are made at terminal strip J2 pins 8 to 16. J2 inputs can be wired as active High or
active Low as shown in Figure 3‐17. Internal or external power source is selected by jumpers JP5 and JP6
shown in Figure 3‐16.

Figure 3‐17 Active HIGH (Sourcing)/LOW (Sinking) Relationship


Internally Supplied 24VDC Externally Supplied 24VDC
Active High Connections Active Low Connections Active High Connections Active Low Connections

JP6 JP6 JP6 JP6


ENP INP ENP INP ENP INP ENP INP

JP5 JP5 JP5 JP5


J2 EPN DFT J2 EPN DFT J2 EPN DFT J2 EPN DFT

8 Enable 8 Enable 8 Enable 8 Enable


9 Digital Input 1 9 Digital Input 1 9 Digital Input 1 9 Digital Input 1
10 Digital Input 2 10 Digital Input 2 10 Digital Input 2 10 Digital Input 2
11 Digital Input 3 11 Digital Input 3 11 Digital Input 3 11 Digital Input 3
12 Digital Input 4 12 Digital Input 4 12 Digital Input 4 12 Digital Input 4
13 Digital Input 5 13 Digital Input 5 13 Digital Input 5 13 Digital Input 5
14 Digital Input 6 14 Digital Input 6 14 Digital Input 6 14 Digital Input 6
15 Digital Input 7 15 Digital Input 7 15 Digital Input 7 15 Digital Input 7
16 Digital Input 8 16 Digital Input 8 16 Digital Input 8 16 Digital Input 8

J3 J3 J3 J3
21 External User Return 21 External User Return 21 External User Return 21 External User Return
22 External User +24V 22 External User +24V 22 External User +24V 22 External User +24V
23 Internal +24V 23 Internal +24V 23 Internal +24V 23 Internal +24V
24 Internal 24V Return 24 Internal 24V Return 24 Internal 24V Return 24 Internal 24V Return

Source Sink Source Sink


See recommended tightening torques in Section 6.
Note: These pins are shown wired together. - User Provided - User Provided
Although this can be done, each input is usually connected + 24V Power Source + 24V Power Source
to a switch for individual control of each input condition.

Note: Factory connection of J2-8 (Enable) is made to J3-24 for Internal, Active Low connection. For other
configurations, the wire at J3-24 must be moved to J3-23, J3-21 or J3-22 as needed.

3‐16 Receiving & Installation MN740


Operating Modes The operating modes define the basic motor control setup and the operation of the input and output terminals.
After the circuit connections are completed, the operating mode is selected by programming the Operating Mode
parameter in the Level 1 Input Setup Programming Block.

Operating modes include:


• Keypad
• Standard Run, 2Wire
• Standard Run, 3Wire
• 15 Preset Speeds
• Fan Pump 2Wire
• Fan Pump 3Wire
• Process Control
• 3 SPD ANA 2Wire
• 3 SPD ANA 3Wire
• Electronic Pot 2Wire
• Electronic Pot 3Wire
• Network
• Profile Run
• Bipolar
• PLC

Each mode requires connections to the J1, J2 and J3 terminal strips. The terminal strips are shown in Figure 3‐14.
The connection of each input or output signal is described in the following pages.
Note: Modbus
In general Modbus coils 35 (network reference source) and 81 (bipolar mode) affect any operating mode
that uses the command source parameter. If the command source is driving the mode with the drive in
speed mode and with coil 35 is on, the drive then check coil 81 to determine if the network source is
bipolar. The operating mode will then use the network speed reference. The same is true if the drive is in
torque mode but the operating mode would use the network torque reference instead.

Keypad The Keypad mode allows the control to be operated from the keypad. In this mode only Enable is required.
However, the Stop and External Trip inputs may optionally be used. All other Digital Inputs remain inactive.
The Analog Outputs and Digital Outputs remain active at all times.
Figure 3‐18 Keypad Connection Diagram
J1 J2
See recommended tightening torques in * Enable
Section 6. 1 User Analog Return 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ (Optional Stop) 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 14 Digital Input 6
15 Digital Input 7
External Trip
16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
For keypad operation, only Enable (J2-8) is required. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)
connection information.

J2‐8 CLOSED allows normal control operation. OPEN disables the control and motor coasts to a stop.
J2‐11 Optional STOP input (not required). OPEN motor coasts or brakes to a stop if Level 1 Keypad Setup block, Local Hot Start
parameter is set to “ON”. Motor will restart when switch closes after open.
CLOSED allows normal control operation.
J2‐16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐17


Standard Run 2Wire
In Standard Run 2Wire mode, the control is operated by the digital inputs and the command source. Also, Preset
Speed 1 can be selected. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 3‐19 or logic signals from another
device.
Figure 3‐19 Standard Run 2Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
10K Pot or 1 User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward 9 Digital Input 1
0‐10VDC
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Jog Forward 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Jog Reverse 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Accel/Decel Select 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Preset Speed #1 14 Digital Input 6
Fault Reset 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
See recommended tightening torques in connection information.
Section 6. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal operation.


OPEN disables the control and motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 CLOSED starts motor operation in the Forward direction.
OPEN motor decels to stop.
J2-10 CLOSED starts motor operation in the Reverse direction.
OPEN motor decels to stop.
J2-1 1 CLOSED starts motor JOG operation in the Forward direction.
OPEN motor decels to stop.
J2-12 CLOSED starts motor JOG operation in the Reverse direction.
OPEN motor decels to stop.
J2-13 CLOSED selects ACC / DEC / S‐ACC / S‐DEC group 2.
OPEN selects ACC / DEC / S‐ACC / S‐DEC group 1.
J2-14 CLOSED selects Preset Speed #1, (J2-11 or 12, will override this Preset Speed).
OPEN allows speed command from the command source (P1402).
J2-15 CLOSED to reset fault.
OPEN to run.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).

Note: When command source is a unipolar signal (0-10V, 0-5V, 4-20ma etc.) and forward or reverse are
closed, motion will occur (unless both are closed at the same time).

3‐18 Receiving & Installation MN740


Standard Run 3Wire
In Standard Run 3Wire mode, the control is operated by the digital inputs and the command source. Also,
Preset Speed 1 can be selected. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 3‐20 or logic signals from
another device.
Figure 3‐20 Standard Run 3Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
1 User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
10K Pot or
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
0‐10VDC
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Stop 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Jog 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Accel/Decel 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Preset Speed #1 14 Digital Input 6
Fault Reset Digital Input 7
15
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See Figure 3‐17 for
See recommended tightening torques in 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
connection information. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)
Section 6.

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal operation.


OPEN disables the control and motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 MOMENTARY CLOSED starts motor operation in the Forward direction.
In JOG mode (J2-12 CLOSED), continuous closed jogs motor in the Forward direction.
J2-10 MOMENTARY CLOSED starts motor operation in the Reverse direction.
In JOG mode (J2-12 CLOSED), continuous closed jogs motor in the Reverse direction.
J2-1 1 MOMENTARY OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel time).
J2-12 CLOSED places control in JOG mode, Forward and Reverse run are used to jog the motor.
J2-13 CLOSED selects ACC / DEC / S‐ACC / S‐DEC group 2.
OPEN selects ACC / DEC / S‐ACC / S‐DEC group 1.
J2-14 CLOSED selects Preset Speed #1, (J2-12, will override this Preset Speed).
OPEN allows speed command from the command source (P1402).
J2-15 CLOSED to reset fault.
OPEN to run.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).

Note: When command source is a unipolar signal (0-10V, 0-5V, 4-20ma etc.) and forward or reverse are
closed, motion will occur (unless both are closed at the same time).

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐19


15 Preset Speeds
Operation in 15 Preset Speeds 2‐Wire mode is controlled by the opto isolated inputs at J2. The values of the
Preset Speeds are set in the Level 1 Preset Speeds block, Preset Speed 1 to Preset Speed 15. J2-11 through
J2-14 inputs allow selection of 15 Preset Speeds. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 3‐21 or
logic signals from another device.
Figure 3‐21 15 Speed 2Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
* Enable
1 User Analog Return 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Switch 1 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Switch 2 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Switch 3 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Switch 4 14 Digital Input 6
Accel/Decel 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See recommended tightening torques in See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
Section 6. connection information. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal operation.


OPEN disables the control and motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 CLOSED operates the motor in the Forward direction (with J2-10 open).
OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel time).
J2-10 CLOSED operates motor in the Reverse direction (with J2-9 open).
OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel time).
J2-1 1-14 Selects programmed Preset Speeds as defined in Table 3‐13.
J2-15 CLOSED selects ACC / DEC / S‐ACC / S‐DEC group 2.
OPEN selects ACC / DEC / S‐ACC / S‐DEC group 1.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).

Table 3‐13 Switch Truth Table for 15 Speed, 2Wire Control Mode
J2-1 1 J2-12 J2-13 J2-14 Function
Open Open Open Open Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 1 (P#1001)
Closed Open Open Open Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 2 (P#1002)
Open Closed Open Open Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 3 (P#1003)
Closed Closed Open Open Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 4 (P#1004)
Open Open Closed Open Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 5 (P#1005)
Closed Open Closed Open Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 6 (P#1006)
Open Closed Closed Open Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 7 (P#1007)
Closed Closed Closed Open Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 8 (P#1008)
Open Open Open Closed Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 9 (P#1009)
Closed Open Open Closed Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 10 (P#1010)
Open Closed Open Closed Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 11 (P#1011)
Closed Closed Open Closed Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 12 (P#1012)
Open Open Closed Closed Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 13 (P#1013)
Closed Open Closed Closed Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 14 (P#1014)
Open Closed Closed Closed Selects Level 1:Preset Speed:Preset Speed 15 (P#1015)
Closed Closed Closed Closed Fault Reset

3‐20 Receiving & Installation MN740


Fan Pump 2Wire
Operation in the Fan Pump 2‐Wire mode is controlled by the opto isolated inputs at J2-8 through J2-16.
The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 3‐22 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 3‐22 Fan Pump 2Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
1 User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Analog Input Select 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Run Command 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Speed Command 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Firestat 14 Digital Input 6
Freezestat 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
See recommended tightening torques in
Section 6.
connection information. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal control operation.


OPEN disables the control and the motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 CLOSED operates the motor in the Forward direction (with J2-10 open).
OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel Time).
Note: J2-9 and J2-10 are both closed = Fault Reset.
J2-10 CLOSED operates the motor in the Reverse direction (with J2-9 open).
OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel Time).
Note: J2-9 and J2-10 are both closed = Fault Reset.
J2-1 1 CLOSED selects Analog Input 1 (if J2-13, J2-14 and J2-15 are closed).
OPEN selects Command Source (Level 1, Input, Command Source, if J2-13, J2-14 and J2-15 are closed).
J2-12 CLOSED selects STOP/START and Reset commands from terminal strip.
OPEN selects STOP/START and Reset commands from Keypad.
J2-13 CLOSED allows other selections, see Speed Select Table 3‐14.
OPEN selects speed commanded from Keypad (if J2-14 and J2-15 are closed).
Note: When changing from Terminal Strip to Keypad (J2-12 or J2-13) the motor speed and direction will remain the same after
the change.
J2-14 Firestat. Selects Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed #1.
J2-15 Freezestat. Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed #2 (if J2-14 is closed).
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).
Table 3‐14 Speed Select Table - Fan Pump, 2Wire
J2-1 1 J2-13 J2-14 J2-15 Command
Open Closed Closed Keypad Speed Command
Open Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed #1
Closed Open Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed #2
Open Closed Closed Closed Level 1, Input Setup, Command Source (parameter 1402)
Closed Closed Closed Closed Analog Input 1

Note: When command source is a unipolar signal (0-10V, 0-5V, 4-20ma etc.) and forward or reverse are
closed, motion will occur (unless both are closed at the same time).

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐21


Fan Pump 3Wire
Operation in the Fan Pump 3‐Wire mode is controlled by the opto isolated inputs at J2-8 through J2-16.
The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 3‐23 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 3‐23 Fan Pump 3Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
1 User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Stop 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Run Command 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Speed Command 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Firestat 14 Digital Input 6
Freezestat 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
See recommended tightening torques in connection information.
Section 6. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal control operation.


OPEN disables the control and the motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 MOMENTARY CLOSED starts motor operation in the Forward direction.
Note: Closing both J2-9 and J2-10 at the same time will reset a fault.
J2-10 MOMENTARY CLOSED starts motor operation in the Reverse direction.
Note: Closing both J2-9 and J2-10 at the same time will reset a fault.
J2-1 1 MOMENTARY OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel Time).
J2-12 CLOSED selects STOP/START and Reset commands from terminal strip.
OPEN selects STOP/START and Reset commands from Keypad.
J2-13 CLOSED allows other selections, see Speed Select Table 3‐15.
OPEN selects speed commanded from Keypad (if J2-14 and J2-15 are closed).
Note: When changing from Terminal Strip to Keypad (J2-12 or J2-13) the motor speed and direction will remain the same after
the change.
J2-14 Firestat. Selects Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed #1.
J2-15 Freezestat. Selects Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed #2 (if J2-14 is closed).
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).
Table 3‐15 Speed Select Table - Fan Pump, 3Wire
J2-13 J2-14 J2-15 Command
Open Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed #1
Closed Open Level 1, Preset Speeds, Preset Speed #2
Open Closed Closed Keypad Speed Command
Closed Closed Closed Level 1, Input Setup, Command Source (parameter 1402)

3‐22 Receiving & Installation MN740


Process Control The process control mode provides an auxiliary closed loop general purpose PID set point control. The
process control loop may be configured in various ways and detailed descriptions of the Process Control are
given in MN707 “Introduction to Process Control”. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 3‐24 or
logic signals from another device.
Figure 3‐24 Process Control Connection Diagram
J1 J2
* Enable
1 User Analog Return 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Enable 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Enable 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Table Select 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Speed/Torque 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Process Mode Enable 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Jog 14 Digital Input 6
Fault Reset 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See recommended tightening torques in See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
Section 6. connection information. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal control operation.


OPEN disables the control and the motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 CLOSED to enable operation in the Forward direction.
OPEN TO DISABLE Forward operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Forward command is still present).
Reverse operation is still possible if J2-10 is closed.
J2-10 CLOSED to enable operation in the Reverse direction.
OPEN to disable Reverse operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Reverse command is still present).
Forward operation is still possible if J2-9 is closed.
Note: If J2-9 and J2-10 are both opened, the drive will decel to a stop.
J2-1 1 CLOSED = TABLE 2, OPEN = TABLE 1. Refer to Table 3‐16.
J2-12 CLOSED Selects ACC/DEC group 2 (V/F) or selects torque mode (Vector)
OPEN Selects ACC/DEC group 1 (V/F) or selects speed mode (Vector)
Note: If a stop command is issued while in the torque (current) mode, the control will stop but will not maintain position
(zero current). This is different than zero speed operation for the velocity mode.
J2-13 CLOSED to enable PID and FF. Feedforward (FF) is from P1402 (Command Source).
OPEN to enable FF only. PID is disabled with its integrator reset to zero.
J2-14 CLOSED to enable JOG mode. Jog in either direction is allowed if enabled by J2-9 or J2-10.
J2-15 CLOSED to reset a fault.
OPEN to run.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).

Table 3‐16 Table Select - Process Control


J2-1 1 Command
Open Selects Parameter Table 1
Closed Selects Parameter Table 2

Note: See multiple parameter sets in this section.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐23


3 Speed Analog 2Wire
Provides 2 wire input control and allows selection of 3 Preset Speeds. The values of the Preset Speeds are set
in the Level 1 Preset Speeds block, Preset Speed #1, Preset Speed #2 and Preset Speed #3. The opto inputs
can be switches as shown in Figure 3‐25 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 3‐25 3 Speed Analog 2Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
1 User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Analog Input Select 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Run Command 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Speed Command 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Switch 1 14 Digital Input 6
Switch 2 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
See recommended tightening torques in
Section 6.
connection information. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal control operation.


OPEN disables the control and the motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 CLOSED operates the motor in the Forward direction (with J2-10 open).
OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel time).
J2-10 CLOSED operates the motor in the Reverse direction (with J2-9 open).
OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel time).
Note: Closing both J2-9 and J2-10 at the same time will reset a fault.
J2-1 1 CLOSED selects Analog Input 1.
OPEN selects Level 1 Input block, Command Source parameter.
Note: If Command Source (Level 1 Input block) is set to Analog Input 1, then Analog Input 1 is always selected
regardless of this switch position.
J2-12 CLOSED selects STOP/START and Reset commands from terminal strip.
OPEN selects STOP/START and Reset commands from Keypad.
J2-13 CLOSED selects Level 1 Input block, Command Source parameter.
OPEN selects speed commanded from Keypad.
Note: When changing from Terminal Strip to Keypad (J2-12 or J2-13) the motor speed and direction will remain
the same after the change.
J2-14 Selects Preset Speeds as defined in the Speed Select Table (Table 3‐17).
J2-15 Selects Preset Speeds as defined in the Speed Select Table (Table 3‐17).
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).
Table 3‐17 Speed Select Table
J2-14 J2-15 Command
OPEN OPEN Level 1, Input Setup, Command Source (parameter 1402)
CLOSED OPEN Preset #1
OPEN CLOSED Preset #2
CLOSED CLOSED Preset #3

Note: When command source is a unipolar signal (0-10V, 0-5V, 4-20ma etc.) and forward or reverse are
closed, motion will occur (unless both are closed at the same time).

3‐24 Receiving & Installation MN740


3 Speed Analog 3Wire
Provides 3 wire input control and allows selection of 3 Preset Speeds. The values of the Preset Speeds are set
in the Level 1 Preset Speeds block, Preset Speed #1, Preset Speed #2 and Preset Speed #3. The opto inputs
can be switches as shown in Figure 3‐26 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 3‐26 3 Speed Analog 3Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
1 User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Stop 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Run Command 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Speed Command 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Switch 1 14 Digital Input 6
Switch 2 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
See recommended tightening torques in connection information.
Section 6. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal control operation.


OPEN disables the control and the motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 MOMENTARY CLOSED starts motor operation in the Forward direction.
J2-10 MOMENTARY CLOSED starts motor operation in the Reverse direction.
Note: Closing both J2-9 and J2-10 at the same time will reset a fault.
J2-1 1 MOMENTARY OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel time).
J2-12 CLOSED selects STOP/START and Reset commands from terminal strip.
OPEN selects STOP/START and Reset commands from Keypad.
J2-13 CLOSED selects Level 1 Input block, Command Source parameter.
OPEN selects speed commanded from Keypad.
Note: When changing from Terminal Strip to Keypad (J2-12 or J2-13) the motor speed and direction will remain
the same after the change.
J2-14 Selects Preset Speeds as defined in the Speed Select Table (Table 3‐18).
J2-15 Selects Preset Speeds as defined in the Speed Select Table (Table 3‐18).
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).
Table 3‐18 Speed Select Table
J2-14 J2-15 Command
OPEN OPEN Level 1, Input Setup, Command Source (parameter 1402)
CLOSED OPEN Preset #1
OPEN CLOSED Preset #2
CLOSED CLOSED Preset #3

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐25


E-POT 2Wire
Provides speed Increase and Decrease inputs to allow E-POT (Electronic Potentiometer) operation with 2 wire
inputs. The values of the Preset Speeds are set in the Level 1 Preset Speeds block, Preset Speed #1 or
Preset Speed #2. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure 3‐27 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 3‐27 E-POT 2Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
1 User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Switch 1 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Switch 2 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Accel/Decel 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Increase 14 Digital Input 6
Decrease 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
See recommended tightening torques in connection information.
Section 6. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal control operation.


OPEN disables the control and the motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 CLOSED starts motor operation in the Forward direction.
OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel time).
J2-10 CLOSED starts motor operation in the Reverse direction.
OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel time).
Note: Closing both J2-9 and J2-10 at the same time will reset a fault.
J2-1 1 Selects Preset Speeds as defined in the Speed Select Table (Table 3‐19).
J2-12 Selects Preset Speeds as defined in the Speed Select Table (Table 3‐19).
J2-13 CLOSED selects ACC / DEC / S‐ACC / S‐DEC group 2.
OPEN selects ACC / DEC / S‐ACC / S‐DEC group 1.
J2-14 MOMENTARY CLOSED increases motor speed while contact is closed.
J2-15 MOMENTARY CLOSED decreases motor speed while contact is closed.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).
Table 3‐19 Speed Select Table
J2-1 1 J2-12 Function
OPEN OPEN Electronic Pot
CLOSED OPEN Level 1, Input Setup, Command Source (parameter 1402)
OPEN CLOSED Preset #1
CLOSED CLOSED Preset #2

3‐26 Receiving & Installation MN740


E-POT 3Wire
Provides speed Increase and Decrease inputs to allow E-POT operation with 3 wire inputs. The opto inputs can
be switches as shown in Figure 3‐28 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 3‐28 E-POT 3Wire Connection Diagram
J1 J2
* Enable
1 User Analog Return 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Stop 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- E-POT CMD Select 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Accel/Decel 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Increase 14 Digital Input 6
Decrease 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See recommended tightening torques in See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
Section 6. connection information. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal control operation.


OPEN disables the control and the motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 MOMENTARY CLOSED starts motor operation in the Forward direction.
J2-10 MOMENTARY CLOSED starts motor operation in the Reverse direction.
Note: Closing both J2-9 and J2-10 at the same time will reset a fault.
J2-1 1 Momentary OPEN motor decels to stop (depending on Decel time).
J2-12 CLOSED selects Level 1 Command Source parameter value.
OPEN selects E-POT.
J2-13 CLOSED selects ACC / DEC / S‐ACC / S‐DEC group 2.
OPEN selects ACC / DEC / S‐ACC / S‐DEC group 1.
J2-14 MOMENTARY CLOSED increases motor speed while contact is closed.
J2-15 MOMENTARY CLOSED decreases motor speed while contact is closed.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐27


Network Provides bipolar speed or torque control. Preset speeds are set in software. The opto inputs can be switches as
shown in Figure 3‐29 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 3‐29 Network Connection Diagram
J1 J2
1 User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Enable 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Enable 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 14 Digital Input 6
15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See recommended tightening torques in See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
Section 6. connection information. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal control operation.


OPEN disables the control and the motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 CLOSED to enable operation in the Forward direction.
OPEN TO DISABLE Forward operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Forward command is still present).
Reverse operation is still possible if J2-10 is closed.
J2-10 CLOSED to enable operation in the Reverse direction.
OPEN to disable Reverse operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Reverse command is still present).
Forward operation is still possible if J2-9 is closed.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).

Table 3‐20 Modbus Coils that Affect this Mode


Coil Coil
2 Torque mode (Vector only) 15 Jog mode
3 Speed mode 33 Keypad reference source (local)
Orientation, absolute position orientation Terminal block reference source (remote)
4 34
(Closed Vector or AC Servo only)
5 Position Command absolute (for future use) 35 Network reference source
6 Position Command incremental (for future use) 42 Select Acc/Dec Group 1
7 Position Command track (for future use) 43 Select Acc/Dec Group 2
8 Position Command external (for future use) 78 Stop, stops the motor
9 Homing (available in Closed Vector or AC Servo only) 79 Forward run
10 Process Torque 80 Reverse run
11 Process velocity 81 Bipolar mode
Network current limiting Network Drive enable and drive hardware enable must both
13 82
be set else drive is disabled

3‐28 Receiving & Installation MN740


Profile Run Provides seven run profiles to setup a cyclic operation or test cycle. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in
Figure 3‐30 or logic signals from another device. Speed settings for Speed curve 1 - 7 is Preset Speed 1 to
Preset Speed 7.
Figure 3‐30 Profile Run Connection Diagram
J1 J2
1 User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Cycle 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Run 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 14 Digital Input 6
Reset 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
See recommended tightening torques in connection information.
Section 6. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal operation.


OPEN disables the control and motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 CLOSED to maintain operation in the Forward direction.
OPEN TO DISABLE Forward operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Forward command is still present).
Reverse operation is still possible if J2-10 is closed.
J2-10 CLOSED to maintain operation in the Reverse direction.
OPEN to disable Reverse operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Reverse command is still present).
Forward operation is still possible if J2-9 is closed.
J2-1 1 CLOSED runs the profile for an indefinite number of cycles. When the Level 3, Profile Run, Number of Cycles (P#3001)
cycle count is reached, the counter is reset and the mode restarts (continuous cycling).
Example: If P#3001 = 5 the profile runs 5 times, the counter is reset to zero, and will begin running 5 more cycles immediately.
As long as pin 11 is closed it will keep resetting the count to zero every time the number of cycles is reached.
OPEN cycle mode is terminated when cycle count is reached.
J2-12 CLOSED uses Run Command from J2-9 or J2-10.
OPEN uses Run Command from Keypad.
J2-13 Not used.
J2-14 Not used.
J2-15 CLOSED resets an alarm or fault.
OPEN normal operation.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐29


Bipolar Provides bipolar speed or torque control, Vector modes only. Preset Speeds are set in software, the control is
operated by the digital inputs and the command source. The opto inputs can be switches as shown in Figure
3‐31 or logic signals from another device.
Figure 3‐31 Bipolar Connection Diagram
Open Loop Vector Mode
J2
J1 * Enable 8 Enable
Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
1 User Analog Return
Reverse Run
2 Analog Input 1 10 Digital Input 2
3 Analog Ref. Power + 11 Digital Input 3
Speed/Torque 12 Digital Input 4
4 Analog Input 2+
Switch 1
5 Analog Input 2- 13 Digital Input 5
V/F Mode Switch 2 14 Digital Input 6
6 Analog Output 1 J2 Fault Reset
7 Analog Output 2 * 15 Digital Input 7
Enable 8 Enable External Trip 16 Digital Input 8 *
Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1 17 Digital Output 1 +
Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2 18 Digital Output 1 -
See Figure 3‐17 for
11 Digital Input 3 connection information. 19 Digital Output 1 +
12 Digital Input 4 20 Digital Output 2 -
Switch 1 13 Digital Input 5
Switch 2 14 Digital Input 6
Fault Reset 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip See recommended tightening torques in
16 Digital Input 8
Section 6.
17 Digital Output 1 +
See Figure 3‐17 for 18 Digital Output 1 -
connection information. 19 Digital Output 1 + *Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and
20 Digital Output 2 - J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8.

J2-8 CLOSED allows normal control operation.


OPEN disables the control and the motor coasts to a stop.
J2-9 CLOSED to enable operation in the Forward direction.
OPEN TO DISABLE Forward operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Forward command is still present).
Reverse operation is still possible if J2-10 is closed.
J2-10 CLOSED to enable operation in the Reverse direction.
OPEN to disable Reverse operation (drive will decel to a stop if a Reverse command is still present).
Forward operation is still possible if J2-9 is closed.
Note: If J2-9 and J2-10 are both opened, the drive will decel to a stop.
J2-1 1 CLOSED causes the motor to rotate in the forward direction until the load reaches a marker or external switch location.
OPEN allows normal operation.
J2-12 CLOSED puts the control in torque command mode, Vector modes only.
OPEN puts the control in speed (velocity) command mode.
Note: If a stop command is issued while in the torque (current) mode, the control will stop but will not maintain position (zero
current). This is different than zero speed operation for the velocity mode.
J2-13 & 14 Select from four parameter tables as defined in Table 3‐21.
J2-15 Momentary CLOSED to reset fault condition.
OPEN allows normal operation.
J2-16 Optional External Trip input (not required). If used, you must set Level 2 Drive Protect block, External Trip to “ON”.
CLOSED allows normal operation.
OPEN causes an External Trip to be received by the control (when programmed to “ON”).
Table 3‐21 Bipolar Mode Table Select Truth Table
J2-13 J2-14 Function
Open Open Parameter Table 1 (T1)
Closed Open Parameter Table 2 (T2)
Open Closed Parameter Table 3 (T3)
Closed Closed Parameter Table 4 (T4)
Note: See multiple parameter sets in this section.

3‐30 Receiving & Installation MN740


Bipolar Continued
Multiple Parameter Sets
The following procedure allows you to program up to four complete sets of parameter values and to use these
multiple parameter sets. Each parameter table must be properly initialized before use. Each table must have an
operating mode that supports table switching (Process Control, Bipolar or Network) and all motor data and
related parameters must be the same in each table. When programming each parameter set, use the ENTER
key to accept and automatically save parameter values.
Note: The control can be programmed in the REMOTE mode with the drive enabled. The control must be
disabled to change the operating mode parameter. The operating mode is not stored with the other
parameters in a parameter table.
1. If this is a new installation, do this procedure after the Pre‐Operation Checklist and Power‐Up
Procedures at the end of this section.
2. Set the Level 1 INPUT block, Operating Mode parameter value to BIPOLAR in each of the parameter
sets.
3. Set switches J2-13 and J2-14 to Parameter Table 1 (both switches open). Be sure switches J2‐8,
J2-9 and J2-10 are OPEN.
Select Quick Setup from the main Keypad menu. Perform each step including auto tune.
This creates and saves the first parameter set which is numbered Table 1.
4. Set switches J2-13 and J2-14 to Parameter Table 2. Be sure switches J2‐8, J2-9 and J2-10 are
OPEN. Select Quick Setup from the main Keypad menu. Perform each step including auto tune. This
creates and saves the second parameter set which is numbered Table 2.
5. Set switches J2-13 and J2-14 to Parameter Table 3. Be sure switches J2‐8, J2-9 and J2-10 are
OPEN. Select Quick Setup from the main Keypad menu. Perform each step including auto tune. This
creates and saves the third parameter set which is numbered Table 3.
6. Set switches J2-13 and J2-14 to Parameter Table 4. Be sure switches J2‐8, J2-9 and J2-10 are
OPEN. Select Quick Setup from the main Keypad menu. Perform each step including auto tune. This
creates and saves the final parameter set which is numbered Table 4.
7. Remember that to change the value of a parameter in one of the parameter tables, you must first
select the table using the switches. You cannot change a value in a table until you have first selected
that table.
Note: The active parameter table is selected by Level 2:Drive Configure:Active Parameter Table P# 0052.

Example:
Before attempting to switch parameter tables during operation “on the fly” using the digital inputs J2-13 & 14, the
operating mode for each parameter table to be used must be initialized. Specifically, to switch from Table 1 to
Table 2 then back to Table 1 both parameter Table 1 and parameter Table 2 must have operating modes that
support table switching. Otherwise, once the switch occurs, switching back will not be possible.

To illustrate this, prior to running Bipolar Mode perform the following steps:

1. Use the keypad, set Level 2:Drive Configure:Active Parameter Table to 0 “Table 1”.
2. Go to Level One and set Level 1: Input Setup:Operating Mode to Bipolar.
Repeat the above steps but this time for Table 2.
3. Use the keypad, set Level 2:Drive Configure:Active Parameter Table to 1 “Table 2”.
4. Go to Level One and set Level 1: Input Setup:Operating Mode to Bipolar.
The drive is now properly configured to switch between parameter Table 1 and Table 2 “on the fly”.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐31


Digital Outputs Digital Outputs 1 and 2 are opto isolated. Internal supply or a customer provided, external power source may be
used as shown in Figure 3‐32. The maximum voltage from Digital Output to common when active is 1.0 VDC
(TTL compatible).
If the Digital Outputs are used to directly drive a relay, a flyback diode rated at 1A, 100V (IN4002 or equivalent)
minimum should be connected across the relay coil. See Figure 3‐33. Each opto output is programmed in the
Output programming block.
Figure 3‐32 Digital Output Power Connections
Internally Supplied 24VDC Externally Supplied 24VDC
Sourcing Current Connections Sinking Current Connections Sourcing Current Connections Sinking Current Connections
J2 J2
Out1 Out1
17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector) 17 Digital Output 1 +
J2 J2
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter) 18 Digital Output 1 -
Out2 Out2
19 Digital Output 2 + (Collector) 19 Digital Output 2 +
17 Digital Output 1 + 17 Digital Output 1 + 20 Digital Output 2 -
Out1 Digital Output 1 -
20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter) Out1 Digital Output 1 -
18 18
19 Digital Output 2 + 19 Digital Output 2 +
Out2 J3 Out2
20 Digital Output 2 - 20 Digital Output 2 - J3
21 External User Return 21 External User Return
J3 22 External User +24V J3 22 External User +24V
21 External User Return
23 Internal +24V
21 External User Return 23 Internal +24V
22 External User +24V
24 Internal 24V Return
22 External User +24V 24 Internal 24V Return
23 Internal +24V 23 Internal +24V
24 Internal 24V Return 24 Internal 24V Return
+ -
User
24VDC
See recommended tightening torques in Section 6. - +
User
24VDC
Note: Digital Outputs are rated to 24VDC @ 60mA resistive (non-inductive).
Relay Outputs are rated to 10-30VDC or 240VAC @ 5A resistive (non-inductive).

Relay Outputs Relay Outputs 1 and 2 provide N.O. and N.C. voltage free contacts. The internal relay function is shown in
Figure 3‐33.
Figure 3‐33 Relay Contacts
J3 If the load is a DC relay If the load is an AC relay
Control Board coil, install a flyback diode coil, install an RC Snubber
across the coil to reduce
RC snubber
Relay Out 1 N.C. 25 Load across the coil to reduce +
Relay Out 1 COM 26 noise transmission. noise transmission.
Relay Out 1 N.O. 27 Load
RE 0.47 f
RE
Relay Out 2 N.C. 28 Load 33 
Relay Out 2 COM 29 -
Relay Out 2 N.O. 30 Load
See recommended tightening torques in Section 6.

USB Port The USB port shown in Figure 3‐35 is a full 12Mbps USB 2.0 compliant port for serial communications.
The connections are described in Figure 3‐34 and Table 3‐22.
Figure 3‐34 USB Receptacle Pin Identification
Host End (USB-A) 1 4

2 1
Peripheral End (USB-B)
3 4

Table 3‐22 USB Port Connections


Pin Signal Name Description
1 Vbus USBus power from the host for monitoring.
2 D- Data Return
3 D+ Data In
4 GND Power Supply Return

3‐32 Receiving & Installation MN740


Figure 3‐35 Expansion Board Location

Keypad REGEN
Connector Board
Connector
JP3 Ribbon Cable

I/O Module Slot1 RS485 Control


View From Rear (Opposite J1 Connector) Board
I/O Module
Slot2

Feedback
Module Slot3
J1
J2
J3 See recommended Terminal Tightening Torques in Section 6.

Communication Expansion Boards


The communication and feedback module slots are shown in Figure 3‐35. All option boards are designed as
plug-in modules.
RS485 Modbus The serial communications port on the H2 control board supports RS485 communications, Figure 3‐35. The baud
rate and node address are selectable from the Keypad. Jumper JP3 (Figure 3‐35) on the control board sets
termination. As shown (pins 2 and 3 jumpered) no terminator resistor is used. Setting the jumper to pins 1 and 2
selects the 120 ohm terminating resistor for the RS485 cable. The RS485 connections are described in Table 3‐23.
Refer to MN744 for connection and software information.

Table 3‐23 RS485 Multi-Drop Port Connections


Pin Signal Name Description
1 SCR Screen termination, connected to chassis on the control board.
2 B RS485 data line
3 A RS485 data line
S 4 GND Common
B
A
G 5 SCR Screen termination, connected to chassis on the control board.
S
See recommended tightening torques in Section 6.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐33


Opto‐Isolated Inputs The equivalent circuit of the nine opto inputs is shown in Figure 3‐36. The function of each input
depends on the operating mode selected and are described previously in this section. This Figure
also shows the connections using the internal opto input Supply.
Figure 3‐36 Opto‐Input Connections
J2 See recommended terminal tightening torques in Section 6.
Enable
8
Digital Input 1
9
Digital Input 2
10
Digital Input 3
11
Digital Input 4
12
Digital Input 5
13
Digital Input 6
14
Digital Input 7
15
Digital Input 8
16

See Figure 3‐17 for


connection information.
6.8K 6.8K 6.8K 6.8K 6.8K 6.8K 6.8K 6.8K 6.8K
Opto In Common

Opto Isolated Outputs The outputs are opto isolated and may be configured for sinking or sourcing. However, all must be
configured the same. The maximum voltage from opto output to common when active is 1.0 VDC
(TTL compatible). The equivalent circuit for the opto isolated outputs is shown in Figure 3‐37.
Figure 3‐37 Opto‐Output Equivalent Circuit
J2

Digital Output 1 + (Collector)


17
Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
18
Digital Output 2 + (Collector)
19
PC865 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)
50mA max 20

PC865 See recommended Terminal Tightening Torques in Section 6.


50mA max

3‐34 Receiving & Installation MN740


Pre‐Operation Checklist Check of Electrical Items
1. Verify AC line voltage at source matches control rating.
2. Inspect all power connections for accuracy, workmanship and tightness and compliance to codes.
3. Verify control and motor are grounded to each other and the control is connected to earth ground.
4. Check all signal wiring for accuracy.
5. Be certain all brake coils, contactors and relay coils have noise suppression. This should be an R‐C
filter for AC coils and reverse polarity diodes for DC coils. MOV type transient suppression is not
adequate.
Powerup Procedure
1. Remove all power from the control.
2. Verify that any enable inputs to J2‐8 are open.
3. Disconnect the motor from the load (including coupling or inertia wheels). If the load cannot be
disconnected, refer to Section 6 and manually tune the control. After manual tuning, perform steps 8
through 16.
4. Turn power on. Be sure there are no faults.
5. Set the Level 2 Output Limits block, “OPERATING ZONE” parameter as desired
(STD CONST TQ, STD VAR TQ, QUIET CONST TQ or QUIET VAR TQ).
6. If external dynamic brake hardware is used, set the Level 2 Brake Adjust block “Resistor Ohms” and
“Resistor Watts” parameters.
7. Enable the control (J2-8 connect to J3-24).
WARNING: The motor shaft will rotate during this procedure. Be certain that unexpected motor shaft
movement will not cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
8. Select Quick Setup from the main Keypad menu. Perform each step including auto tune.
9. Remove all power from the control.
10. Couple the motor to its load.
11. Verify freedom of motion of motor shaft.
12. Verify the motor coupling is tight without backlash.
13. Verify the holding brakes if any, are properly adjusted to fully release and set to the desired torque
value.
14. Turn power on. Be sure no errors are displayed.
15. Run the drive from the keypad using one of the following: the arrow keys for direct speed control, a
keypad entered speed or the JOG mode.
16. Select and program additional parameters to suit your application.

The control is now ready for use the in keypad mode. If a different operating mode is desired, refer to Section 3
Operating Modes and Section 4 Programming and Operation.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐35


Workbench As an alternative to using the keypad for programming and setup, Baldor's Workbench software version 5.5 or
greater can be used with H2 controls. When the software is installed and configured, the help topics provide
information for how to use the software. The following procedure will help you install and configure the software
to minimize difficulty.
Before you can use Workbench software, it must be installed on your PC's hard drive.
Be sure that the USB port of the H2 control is connected to a USB port on your PC.
This must be connected to establish communication after the software is installed.
Install USB Driver for H2 Control
The H2 control connects to a PC by using USB cable connection. Windows requires that the USB drivers for the
H2 control be installed. This procedure installs the USB driver.
1. The software must be downloaded from the Baldor site: http://www.baldor.com
Simply log into that web site and select Products then select AC Controls then select H2 Inverter to
locate the Software tools.
2. USB Device Driver
Figure 3‐38 USB Driver

Select Control Type

Select Software Tool

2. Click on USB Device Driver and select Open to view the uncompressed files.

3. Select the inf and sys files and copy them to a folder on your hard drive. These will be installed next.
4. Be sure the H2 control is powered up.
5. Connect the USB cable to the control. Windows should find a new USB device.
6. Install the USB drivers.
a. Choose “install from a list or specific location” and click Next.
b. Choose “Don't search I will choose the driver to install”.
c. Click “Have Disk”. Then enter the location that you stored the inf and sys files (in step 3) and
click Next to install the driver files.

7. Proceed to the Workbench installation procedure.

3‐36 Receiving & Installation MN740


Install Workbench
1. Use the Add/Remove Software feature of the Windows control panel and remove previous versions of
Workbench software.
2. The software must be downloaded from the Baldor site: http://www.baldor.com
Simply log into that web site, Figure 3‐38, and locate
1. Mint WorkBench v X.x
3. Click on Download the software, and run the installation program.
4. When installation is complete, the Workbench program will start, see Figure 3‐39.
a. Click “Start New Project”.
b. Click “Scan”.
c. Select “H2” platform from the list.
d. Click Select and the workbench main menu is displayed, see Figure 3‐40.
Figure 3‐39 Workbench Software Start-up

b
X.x

a c

Figure 3‐40 Communication Established

Software version is Inverter (IHH) version 1 release 03.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐37


5. Parameter values can be modified as desired.
Figure 3‐41 Workbench Main Menu
Change a Parameter Value
Example:
Change Preset Speed 1 to 21.00Hz.
Click on Preset Speeds Block.
Click in the Value column for Preset Speed 1.
Type in the new value “21.00Hz” press enter.
Note that the keypad will instantly display the
new value.

If the parameter value is a selection, a


list will appear for you to make the selection.

6. When all parameter values are as desired, they can be saved to a file. Click File, Save File, see
Figure 3‐42. The ptx file is saved in My Documents\My Mint directory.
7. When complete, the entire project can be saved to your PCs hard disk for future use. Click File, Save
Project, see Figure 3‐42. The wbx file is saved in C:\Program Files\Mint Machine Center\Firmware\
you can choose the directory H2 Inverter etc.
Figure 3‐42 Save Parameters & Project

Note: Note:
Enter a filename. Enter a filename.
The .ptx extension is automatically added. The .wbx extension is automatically added.

The help menus provided with the software can be used to explore other features and descriptions of menu
choices. As previously stated, either the Workbench program or the Keypad can be used to adjust parameter
values for the application.

3‐38 Receiving & Installation MN740


Update Firmware
Installing chx Files
(If you are installing msx files skip this procedure and go to “Installing msx Files”).

This procedure erases memory and restores factory settings. All user data will be lost. After the firmware
download, all user data values must be reprogrammed.
1. The software must be downloaded from the Baldor site: http://www.baldor.com
Simply log into that web site, Figure 3‐38. Locate and click on
3. Firmware
Firmware for H2 Inverter
2. Save the firmware file to a location on your hard disk
(for example: C:\Program Files\Mint Machine Center\Firmware\H2 Inverter\IHH_1_04.chx).
This procedure erases memory and restores factory settings. All user data will be lost. After the firmware
download, all user data values must be reprogrammed.
3. Start the Workbench program as before, see Figure 3‐43.
a. Select “Download Firmware” from the Tools menu.
b. Select “Advanced” then “Download Firmware File”, click “Yes” at the warning to download.
c. Select the firmware file to download (for example: IHH_1_04.chx).
d. When complete, the new firmware version is displayed and the control is ready for use.
Note: All user settings and motor parameter values have been over written by factory settings.
Figure 3‐43 Workbench Firmware Update

a c
d

Software version is Inverter (IHH) version 1 release 04.

MN740 Receiving & Installation 3‐39


Installing A Mint System (.msx) file
(If you are installing chx files skip this procedure and go to “Installing chx Files”).

This procedure erases memory and restores factory settings. All user data will be lost. After the firmware
download, all user data values must be reprogrammed.
1. The msx file must be saved to a location on your hard disk
(for example: C:\Program Files\Mint Machine Center\Firmware\H2 Inverter\H2 Inverter Build
104.msx).
This procedure installs the msx file contents within the same directory (chx, ini and txt files are extracted).
2. Start the Workbench program as before, see Figure 3‐39.
a. Select “Install System File Firmware” from the Tools menu, Figure 3‐44.
b. Select the firmware file to download (for example: H2 Inverter Build 104.msx)
c. Select OPEN.
d. When complete, the install successful message is displayed, click OK.
Figure 3‐44 Workbench Firmware Update

a c

Original msx file

3. This procedure erases memory and restores factory settings. All user data will be lost. After the
firmware download, all user data values must be reprogrammed.
a. Select “Download Firmware” from the Tools menu, Figure 3‐45.
b. Select control Type and version to download.
c. Select Download to control to download the firmware.
d. Select YES to confirm download.
e. When complete, the new firmware version is displayed and the control is ready for use.
Note: All user settings and motor parameter values have been over written by factory settings.
Figure 3‐45 Workbench Firmware Update

b
b d

3‐40 Receiving & Installation MN740


Section 4
Programming and Operation

Overview The keypad is used to program the control parameters, to operate the motor and to monitor the status and
outputs of the control by accessing the display options, the diagnostic menus and the fault log.
Figure 4‐1 Keypad

Display Diagnostics -
I/O Status
Keypad Display ‐ Displays status information STATUS FWD LOCAL I/O Function configuration
during Local or Remote operation. It also displays Modified parameters
information during parameter setup and fault or Control Operation Data
Diagnostic Information. 159.5 V 600 RPM Custom Units
6.2 A 20.0 HZ Fault Display - 10 Faults with Time stamp

DIAG 600r MAIN


A ‐ Alternates or “Toggles” between last two menu
choices or function indicated by text displayed R - Clear faults or undo parameter edit changes or function
directly above key. indicated by text displayed directly above key.

ENTER ‐ Press ENTER to save parameter value  ‐ (Up Arrow),  ‐ (Down Arrow)
changes. In the display mode the ENTER key is used to A ‐ (Left Arrow), " ‐ (Right Arrow)
directly set the local speed reference. It is also used to Moves cursor to select menu choices.
select other operations when prompted by the keypad
display. LOCAL REMOTE ‐ Switches between local and
remote modes.
HELP ‐ Provides help at each display screen, setup
parameter and fault. Press to view/close help information.
MENU - Selects the Menu display.
The following menu items are shown: Status,
Diagnostics, Fault Log, Advanced Programming, JOG ‐ Initiates Jog mode when pressed. Press FWD or REV
and for motion. Only active in local mode.
Quick Start

REV ‐ When pressed, initiates a reverse direction FWD ‐ When pressed, initiates a forward direction
run command. run command.

Indicator Lights ‐ (On indicated Key)


STOP key with red light indicator.
STOP ‐ Initiates a stop command. FWD key with green light indicator.
REV key with green light indicator.
JOG key with green light indicator.

Display features:
STOP=Stop; FWD=Forward; REV=Reverse
Present Menu Selection STATUS FWD LOCAL Local/Remote Mode

159.5V 600RPM
6.2A 20.0HZ

Previous Menu Selection Press R to go back one menu level


(Press A to return to it) DIAG 600r MAIN
Speed Reference

Programming Mode ONLY Display features:


PROG PRESET SPEEDS

PRESET SPEED 1
The first character of the parameter number has the following meaning: 30RPM
F = Factory Setting (parameter value has not been changed)
C = Custom value set by user (not factory setting)
V = Parameter value may be Viewed but not changed. STATUS F1001T1 BACK
L = Parameter value is locked, security code required. Parameter Table used, T1, T2, T3, T4.

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐1


Status Display Mode The control is in the Status display mode at all times except when parameter values are changed
(Programming mode).
When AC power is applied to the control the keypad should display the status.

Action Description Display Comments


Apply Power Logo is displayed for a short time.
The Status screen is then
displayed.

Normal status screen at start up. STATUS STOP LOCAL The display can be changed to
Displays Motor Voltage, Motor several formats by pressing the
Amps, Motor Speed RPM and  or  keys.
Motor Frequency Hz. 0.0V 0RPM
0.0A 0.0HZ
DIAG 0.00r MAIN

Press  key Next screen format is displayed. STATUS LOCAL

0 RPM
STOP
0.0 A
DIAG 0.00r MAIN

Press  key Next screen format is displayed. STATUS LOCAL

0 RPM
STOP
0.00 HZ
DIAG 0.00r MAIN

Press  key Next screen format is displayed. STATUS LOCAL

0.0 A
STOP
0.0 V
DIAG 0.00r MAIN

Press  key Next screen format is displayed. STATUS LOCAL


0 RPM
STOP 0.0 V
0.0 A
DIAG 0.00r MAIN

Press  key Next screen format is displayed. STATUS LOCAL


0.0 NM
STOP 0.0 A
0 RPM
DIAG 0.00r MAIN

4‐2 Programming & Operation MN740


Status Display Mode Continued
Action Description Display Comments
Press  key The first screen format is STATUS STOP LOCAL
displayed.
0.0V 0RPM
0.0A 0.0HZ
DIAG 0.00r MAIN

Press FWD key Motor begins to rotate in the STATUS FWD LOCAL
forward direction at the preset
speed.
159.5V 600RPM
0.2A 20.0HZ
DIAG 0.00r MAIN

Menu Display After power-up the display shows the Status screen. Press the Menu key to display menu options.

Action Description Display Comments


Status Display STATUS STOP LOCAL

0.0V 0RPM
0.0A 0.0HZ
DIAG 0.00r MAIN

Press Menu Displays top level menu options. STATUS


Press  or  to move cursor over
QUICK SETUP the desired selection the press
PROGRAMMING “Enter” to select and display the
EVENT LOG selection.
DIAGNOSTICS
DISPLAY OPTIONS
DIAG BACK

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐3


Quick Setup From the Menu display screen, select Quick Setup and press Enter.
Parameter Status. All programmable parameters are displayed with an “F” at the bottom center of the display.
“F” means it is the factory setting value. “C” means it is a custom value set by the user. “V” means the
parameter value may be viewed but not changed while the motor is operating. If the parameter is displayed with
an “L”, the value is locked and may not be changed until the security code is entered.

Action Description Display Comments


Quick Setup Display Control type display. The QSETUP MOTOR CONTROL Press Enter to select the
parameter number “1601” is given parameter and press the  or 
at the bottom center of the keys to change the preset value
CONTROL TYPE
display. “F”1601 indicates it is at to a different control type.
the factory setting and has not V/F Control Press enter when finished to exit
been changed. and save the new value or R to
STATUS F1601T1 BACK exit without saving.

Press  to go to the QSETUP MOTOR DATA T1 indicates the Table Number or


next Quick Setup the parameter list in use. Four
screen. parameter tables are available,
MOTOR RATED VOLT
T1, T2, T3 or T4
240.0 V (See Level 2, Drive Config, Active
Param Table parameter P0052.)
STATUS F2401T1 BACK

Press  to go to the QSETUP MOTOR DATA


next Quick Setup
screen.
MOTOR RATED AMPS
9.6 A
STATUS F2402T1 BACK

Press  to go to the QSETUP MOTOR DATA


next Quick Setup
screen.
MOTOR MAG AMPS
6.1 A
STATUS F2405T1 BACK

Press  to go to the QSETUP MOTOR DATA


next Quick Setup
screen.
MOTOR RATED SPD
1754 RPM
STATUS F2403T1 BACK

Press  to go to the QSETUP MOTOR DATA


next Quick Setup
screen.
MOTOR RATED FREQ
60.00 HZ
STATUS F2404T1 BACK

Press  to go to the QSETUP MOTOR DATA


next Quick Setup
screen. CALC MOTOR MODEL
No
STATUS F2413T1 BACK

4‐4 Programming & Operation MN740


Quick Setup Continued
Action Description Display Comments
Press  to go to the QSETUP AUTO-TUNE
next Quick Setup
screen. ANA OFFSET TRIM
No
STATUS F2901T1 BACK

Press  to go to the QSETUP INPUT SETUP


next Quick Setup
screen. OPERATING MODE
Keypad
STATUS F1401T1 BACK

Press  to go to the QSETUP RAMP RATES


next Quick Setup
screen. ACCEL TIME 1
3.0 SEC
STATUS F1101T1 BACK

Press  to go to the QSETUP RAMP RATES


next Quick Setup
screen. DECEL TIME 1
3.0 SEC
STATUS F1104T1 BACK

Press  to go to the QSETUP DRIVE LIMITS


next Quick Setup
screen. MIN OUTPUT SPEED
0.00 HZ
STATUS F2002T1 BACK

Press  to go to the QSETUP DRIVE LIMITS


next Quick Setup
screen. MAX OUTPUT SPEED
60.00 HZ
STATUS F2003T1 BACK

Press ENTER or R to QSETUP


exit Quick Setup.
END OF
QUICK SET UP
STATUS BACK

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐5


Quick Setup Continued
How to Change a Value
These are the Quick Setup screens. To change a value, simply display the desired screen and press Enter and
change the value. For example:

Action Description Display Comments


Press  to go to the 1601 indicates the parameter QSETUP MOTOR CONTROL
next Quick Setup number and F indicates it is the
screen. factory value. CONTROL TYPE
V/F Control
STATUS F1601T1 BACK

Press Enter to choose EDIT MOTOR CONTROL Press “R” to EXIT edit mode
parameter value and without saving changes.
edit. CONTROL TYPE
V/F Control
END F1601T1 BACK

Press the  or  keys EDIT MOTOR CONTROL


to change parameter
value. CONTROL TYPE
Open Vector
END F1601T1 BACK

Press Enter to save the QSETUP MOTOR CONTROL


parameter value and
exit. CONTROL TYPE
Open Vector
STATUS C1601T1 BACK

When editing a parameter value, the function of the “A” key (previous parameter block) shown in the lower left of
the display changes to one of the following to help select the parameter value:
TOP Press “A” to display and select the first value in the list of parameter values.
When the first parameter value is displayed, press Enter or scroll to select a different value.
END Press “A” to display and select the last value in the list of parameter values.
When the last parameter value is displayed, press Enter or scroll to select a different value.
DEF Press “A” to display and select the Factory Setting value.
PREV Press “A” to display and select previous value.
MIN Press “A” to display and select minimum parameter value.
MAX Press “A” to display and select maximum parameter value.

Note: When END is displayed, Press “A” will display the last value in the list but then TOP or DEF is displayed.
The “A” key allows you to quickly move the large lists of parameter choices. The value is not selected
until you press “Enter”.

4‐6 Programming & Operation MN740


Save Parameter Values
The keypad keys and display work with the memory of the control. When a parameter value is displayed, the
displayed value is the value stored in control memory. The changes are written to non-volatile memory and are
stored even when power is removed. Normal control operation can resume when power is restored.
Keypad memory is only used to backup the four parameter tables stored in control memory. This means that
after the parameters are configured for the application and the control operation is as desired, a copy of the
parameters can be saved to keypad memory as a backup copy. This backup copy can be restored at any time.
This is useful to restore program operation after a firmware update or to make several controls operate the same.
It prevents having to make the changes to each control individually.

Action Description Display Comments


Press Menu Go to the Level 1 Keypad Setup PRESET SPEEDS Press “Enter” to select.
block. RAMP RATES
JOG SETTINGS
KEYPAD SETUP
INPUT SETUP

STATUS BACK

Press Enter to edit Scroll to PARAMS TO KEYPAD PROG KEYPAD SETUP Press “Enter” to change
Keypad Setup parameter value.
parameters.
PARAMS TO KEYPAD
No
STATUS F1310 BACK

Press Enter to edit edit KEYPAD SETUP Press  to change value to YES.
parameter.
PARAMS TO KEYPAD
Yes
STATUS F1310 BACK

Press Enter to load the PROG KEYPAD SETUP Press “R” to return to Keypad
parameter table values Setup menu.
from control memory to
PARAMS TO KEYPAD
keypad memory.
No
STATUS F1310 BACK

A copy of all four parameter tables have now been saved to non-volatile keypad memory.

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐7


Restore Parameter Values
The keypad keys and display work with the memory of the control. When a parameter value is displayed, the
displayed value is the value stored in control memory. The changes are written to non-volatile memory and are
stored even when power is removed. Normal control operation can resume when power is restored.
Keypad memory is only used to backup the four parameter tables stored in control memory. This means that
after the parameters are configured for the application and the control operation is as desired, a copy of the
parameters can be saved to keypad memory as a backup copy. This backup copy can be restored at any time.
This is useful to restore program operation after a firmware update or to make several controls operate the same.
It prevents having to make the changes to each control individually.

Action Description Display Comments


Press Menu Go to the Level 1 Keypad Setup PRESET SPEEDS Press “Enter” to select.
block. RAMP RATES
JOG SETTINGS
KEYPAD SETUP
INPUT SETUP

STATUS BACK

Press Enter to edit Scroll to DOWNLOAD SELECT PROG KEYPAD SETUP ALL=Download all parameters.
Keypad Setup and change as desired. Motor= Download only Motor
parameters. Parameters.
DOWNLOAD SELECT
ALL Other=All parameters other than
motor parameters.
STATUS F1311T1 BACK

Press Enter to edit Scroll to KEYPAD TO PARAMS PROG KEYPAD SETUP Press “Enter” to change
Keypad Setup parameter value.
parameters.
KEYPAD TO PARAMS
Note that T1 is missing from the
No parameter number. It is not part
of the stored parameter table
STATUS F1312T1 BACK values T1, T2, T3 and T4.

Press Enter to edit edit KEYPAD SETUP Press  to change value to YES.
parameter.
KEYPAD TO PARAMS
Yes
STATUS F1312T1 BACK

Press Enter to load the PROG KEYPAD SETUP Press “R” to return to Keypad
parameter table values Setup menu.
from keypad memory to
KEYPAD TO PARAMS
control memory.
No
STATUS F1312T1 BACK

A copy of all four parameter tables have now been restored to non-volatile control memory.

4‐8 Programming & Operation MN740


Programming The Program Mode is used to:
1. Enter motor data.
2. Auto tune the motor.
3. Customize the drive (Control and Motor) parameters to your application.
Parameter Status. All programmable parameters are displayed with its parameter number shown at the bottom
center of the display. “F” means it is the factory setting value. “C” means it is a custom value set by the user.
“V” means the parameter value may be viewed but not changed while the motor is operating. If the parameter is
displayed with an “L”, the value is locked and may not be changed until the security code is entered.

Action Description Display Comments


Programming Display Top Level Programming menu. Press enter to program level 1
LEVEL 1 BLOCKS block parameters.
LEVEL 2 BLOCKS or
LEVEL 3 BLOCKS Press  to view Level 2 blocks.
MODIFIED PARAMS Press  to view Level 3 blocks.
Press  to view list of parameters
STATUS BACK that have been changed from their
factory settings.
Press Enter to edit Level Top of Level 1 programming Block PRESET SPEEDS Press  to scroll to next level 1
1 parameters. 1 menu. RAMP RATES parameter.
JOG SETTINGS
KEYPAD SETUP
INPUT SETUP

STATUS BACK

Press Enter to select Preset speed 1 value display. PROG PRESET SPEEDS Press  to go to next Preset
Preset Speeds. Speed parameter.
PRESET SPEED 1
1.00 HZ
STATUS F1001T1 BACK

Press Enter to edit Press  or  to increase or EDIT PRESET SPEEDS Press  or  to move cursor.
Preset Speed 1. decrease the value highlighted by
the cursor. Press “A” to select the maximum
PRESET SPEED 1
allowable speed.
001.00 HZ
MAX F1001T1 BACK

Press  to increase the value. EDIT PRESET SPEEDS Press R to exit editing the value
without saving or press Enter to
exit and save the new value.
PRESET SPEED 1
002.00 HZ
MAX F1001T1 BACK

Press Enter to save the PROG PRESET SPEEDS Press R to return to previous
new value and stop screen.
editing.
PRESET SPEED 1
Press A to go to Status screen.
2.00 HZ
STATUS C1001T1 BACK

Parameter values in other Level 1, 2 and 3 blocks can be selected and edited in the same way.

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐9


Event Log From the Menu display screen, select Event Log and press enter. Trace is used to display control conditions
present at the time the fault occurred. A separate trace log is recorded for each event. This is described in
Section 5 of this manual.

Action Description Display Comments


Event Log Display Displays error name, EV. LOG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to view next entry.
Entry # and time the
error occurred. Press R to view Trace log.
LOW INITIAL BUS
Press A to return to Status Menu.
LOW INITIAL BUS 0 04-Jul-06 09:35:00
0 Date Time Note: Trace is described in
STATUS TRACE Section 5 of this manual.
Entry # DD/MM/YY HH:MM
0-9

Trace is used to display control conditions present at the time the fault occurred. Input states, Output states,
various voltage and current values etc. can be viewed to help understand the cause of the fault condition.
See Section 5 of this manual for more information.

Diagnostics From the Menu display screen, select Diagnostics and press enter. These are read only values.
See Section 5 for a more detailed description.

Action Description Display Comments


Press Menu Displays top level menu options. STATUS Press  or  to move cursor over
QUICK SETUP the “DIAGNOSTICS” selection.
PROGRAMMING
EVENT LOG Press Enter to view diagnostic
DIAGNOSTICS information.
DISPLAY OPTIONS
EV. LOG BACK

Press  to display next DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or


group. previous Diagnostic screen.
POWER BASE
DC Bus Voltage BUS VOLTAGE 333.9V Press R to return to previous
Drive Heatsink Temperature DRIVE TEMP 26.1C menu.
% Overload (remaining) OVERLOAD LE 100.0%
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

Press  to display next Displays active operating mode DIAG STOP LOCAL
group. settings.
OPERATING MODE
Keypad
Speed
V/F Control
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

Press  to display next Bit display of digital inputs, DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. outputs and the voltage present at previous Diagnostic screen.
the internal 24V supply terminals. DIGITAL I/O
Note: Enable input=1. INPUTS 100000000 Press R to return to previous
Out1=1. OUTPUTS 0001 menu.
USER 24V 24.9V
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

Press  to display next DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or


group. previous Diagnostic screen.
PROC CONTROL PID Press R to return to previous
Output Frequency, % Feedforward 0.00HZ 0.0FF menu.
% Setpoint, % Feedback 0.0SP 0.0FB Note:
This screen does not appear if Level 2
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN Process Control, Process type is set to
None.

4‐10 Programming & Operation MN740


Diagnostics Continued

Action Description Display Comments


Diagnostic Display Displays software version, hp, DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
volts and Amp/Volt ratings. previous Diagnostic screen.
IHH-1.XX
RATED HP 3HP Press R to return to previous
RATED VOLTS 240.0V
menu.
RATED A/V 4.0A/V
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

Press  to display next DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or


group. previous Diagnostic screen.
IHH-1.XX
RATED CURRE 9.6A Press R to return to previous
RATED PK CU 16.8A menu.

EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

Press  to display next DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or


group. Displays: previous Diagnostic screen.
POWER BASE VERSION
Power Base ID number ID 0x000A2003 Press R to return to previous
EE Firmware version EE VER 0x00000001 menu.
FPGA firmware version FPGA VER 0x00000A02
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN 0x=Hexadecimal
0b=Binary
Press  to display next Displays real time clock values DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. (date and time) and total run time previous Diagnostic screen.
REAL TIME CLOCK
since installation.
Jul 04, 2006
Press R to return to previous
22:07:35
Press ENTER to set date and menu.
time. RUN TIMER 474.1HR
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

Press  to display next Displays energy cost (based on DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. parameter # 2305 value). previous Diagnostic screen.
ENERGY
EST POWER 0.00KW Press R to return to previous
EST ENERGY 0.0KWH
menu.
EST COST 0.0$
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN Press A to go to Status screen.

Press  to display next Diagnostic Analog Input values DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. display. previous Diagnostic screen.
ANALOG INPUTS
ANA IN 1 1.3v Press R to return to previous
ANA IN 2 0.0v menu.

EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

Press  to display next Diagnostic Analog Output values DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. display. previous Diagnostic screen.
ANALOG OUTPUTS
ANA OUT 1 0.0V Press R to return to previous
ANA OUT 2 0.0V menu.

EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐11


Diagnostics Continued

Action Description Display Comments


Press  to display next DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. previous Diagnostic screen.
POSITION COUNTER
Full revolutions and REVOLUTIONS 0 Press R to return to previous
encoder counts are displayed. COUNTS 0CNT menu.

EV. LOG 0r MAIN

Press  to display next Diagnostic installed Option Card DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. identification display. previous Diagnostic screen.
OPTION BOARDS
OPTION 1 ETHERNET Press R to return to previous
OPTION 2 NONE
menu.
FEEDBACK NONE
EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN Press A to go to Status screen.
Press  to display next Displays keypad software version. DIAG STOP LOCAL
group.
KEYPAD VERSION
KEYPAD SOF 1.XX 03/0

EV. LOG 0.00r MAIN

Press  to display next Displays Composite Reference DIAG STOP LOCAL


group. values.
COMPOSITE REF
COMPONENT A 0.00%
COMPONENT B 0.00%
REFERENCE 0.00%
EV. LOG 0.00r Alarm

4‐12 Programming & Operation MN740


Display Options
From the Menu display screen, select Display Options and press enter to view or change values.

Action Description Display Comments


PROG KEYPAD SETUP Press “Enter” to change
parameter value.
Press  or  to display next
KEYPAD CONTRAST screen.
50%
Press “R” to return to previous
DIAG F1313T1 BACK menu.

PROG KEYPAD SETUP Press “Enter” to change


parameter value.
Press  or  to display next
BACKLIGHT screen.
On
Press “R” to return to previous
DIAG F1314T1 BACK menu.

Operating the Control from the Keypad


To activate the LOCAL Mode, first press the “STOP” key (if enabled).
Note: Pressing the keypad STOP key (if enabled) will automatically issue a motor stop command and change to
LOCAL mode.
Selection of LOCAL Mode overrides any remote or serial control inputs except the External Trip input, Local
Enable Input or STOP input.
The control can operate the motor from the keypad in two ways.
1. JOG Command.
2. Speed adjustment with Keypad entered values and/or Keypad Up/Down arrow keys.
Note: If the level 1, input block operating mode parameter is set to Keypad, then no other means of operation is
permitted other than from the keypad.

Accessing the Keypad JOG Command


Action Description Display Comments
Status Display STATUS STOP LOCAL

0.0V 0RPM
0.0A 0.0HZ
DIAG 0.00r MAIN

Press JOG key The JOG LED will light indicating STATUS FWD LOCAL To change Jog Speed, Edit
Next, press and hold the the JOG mode is active. Holding Level 1 parameter 1201 (Jog
FWD or REV key the FWD or REV key starts JOG Speed).
operation.
30.9V 208RPM
Releasing FWD or REV key will 1.6A 7.0HZ Press STOP key twice to
terminate motor rotation. terminate JOG mode.
DIAG 20.00r MAIN

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐13


Speed Adjustment using Local Speed Reference
Action Description Display Comments
At the Status Display, EDIT LOCAL REFs
press ENTER key to
access Local Speed
Reference. LOC SPEED REF
000.0HZ
MAX F0201 RESET

EDIT LOCAL Press  or  to move cursor.


Press  or  to increase or
decrease value at cursor.
LOC SPEED REF
Press ENTER when finished and
000.0HZ save the new value.

DIAG F0201 BACK

EDIT LOCAL Press  or  to move cursor.


Press  or  to increase or
decrease value at cursor.
LOC SPEED REF
Press ENTER when finished and
020.0HZ save the new value.

DIAG F0201 BACK

Press FWD or REV key. The control will turn the motor STATUS FWD LOCAL Press STOP key to terminate
shaft at the local speed ref speed. local speed mode.
79.7V 599RPM Press  or  to increase or
1.5A 20.0HZ decrease motor speed during
rotation.
DIAG 20.00r MAIN

4‐14 Programming & Operation MN740


Table 4‐1 List of Parameters (Version 1.07)
Level 1 Blocks
Preset Speeds Keypad Setup Output Setup Communication
PRESET SPEED 1 STOP KEY DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 BAUD RATE
PRESET SPEED 2 STOP MODE DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 PARITY
PRESET SPEED 3 RUN FORWARD RELAY OUTPUT 1 STOP BITS
PRESET SPEED 4 RUN REVERSE RELAY OUTPUT 2 DRIVE ADDRESS
PRESET SPEED 5 SWITCH ON FLY ANALOG OUT1 SIGNAL OPT CARD RESET
PRESET SPEED 6 LOCAL HOT START ANALOG OUT2 SIGNAL SECURITY DEFAULT
PRESET SPEED 7 SPEED INCREMENT ANALOG OUT1 TYPE BROWSER USER ID
PRESET SPEED 8 INIT LOCAL SPEED ANALOG OUT2 TYPE BROWSER PASSWORD
PRESET SPEED 9 SET SPEED ANALOG OUT1 GAIN
PRESET SPEED 10 PARAMS TO KEYPAD ANALOG OUT2 GAIN
PRESET SPEED 11 DOWNLOAD SELECT ZERO SPD SET PT
PRESET SPEED 12 KEYPAD TO PARAMS AT SPEED BAND
PRESET SPEED 13 KEYPAD CONTRAST SET SPEED POINT
PRESET SPEED 14 BACKLIGHT OVERLOAD SET POINT
PRESET SPEED 15  LOCAL TORQUE MODE UNDERLOAD SET POINT
 LOCAL TORQUE REFERENCE CALIBRATE ANA OUT
Ramp Rates
ACCEL TIME 1 Input Setup
START S-ACCEL 1 OPERATING MODE Motor Control
END S-ACCEL 1 COMMAND SOURCE CONTROL TYPE
DECEL TIME 1 ANA IN1 TYPE CONTROL BASE SPEED
START S-DECEL 1 ANA IN1 INVERT  CONTROL BASE VOLT
END S-DECEL 1 ANA IN1 GAIN  STATIC BOOST
ACCEL TIME 2 ANA IN1 OFFSET  DYNAMIC BOOST CUT IN
START S-ACCEL 2 ANA IN1 FILTER  DYNAMIC BOOST
END S-ACCEL 2 ANA IN2 TYPE  V/F EFFICIENCY
DECEL TIME 2 ANA IN2 INVERT  V/F PROFILE
START S-DECEL 2 ANA IN2 GAIN  3 POINT METHOD
END S-DECEL 2 ANA IN2 OFFSET  3 POINT VOLTAGE
ANA IN2 DEADBAND  3 POINT FREQUENCY
Jog Settings ANA IN2 FILTER  SLIP COMP ENABLE
JOG SPEED  EXT. CURRENT LIMIT FEEDBACK ALIGN
JOG ACCEL TIME  CURRENT LIMIT SOURCE FEEDBACK FILTER
JOG START S-ACCEL SLEEP MODE  CURRENT PROP GAIN
JOG END S-ACCEL CMD SLEEP BAND  CURRENT INTEGRAL GAIN
JOG DECEL TIME TORQUE FF SOURCE  SPEED PROP GAIN
JOG START S-DECEL  SPEED INTEGRAL GAIN
JOG END S-DECEL  SPEED DIFFERENTIAL GAIN
JOG FORWARD
JOG REVERSE  A.S. PROP GAIN
 A.S. INTEGRAL GAIN
 MOTOR Xm
 MOTOR R1
 MOTOR X1
 MOTOR R2
 MOTOR X2
 ROTOR TIME CONSTANT

Only available or active in Closed Loop Vector mode. Ignore these parameters for Open Loop Vector and V/F modes.
 Only available or active in V/F mode. Ignore these parameters for Open Loop Vector mode.
 Only available or active in either Vector mode. Ignore these parameters for V/F mode.

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐15


Table 4‐1 List of Parameters Continued
Level 2 Blocks
Drive Limits Miscellaneous Brake Adjust Synchro Start
OPERATING ZONE AUTO RESTART RESISTOR OHMS
SYNC START FWD
MIN OUTPUT SPEED RESTARTS/HOUR RESISTOR WATTS
SYNC START REV
MAX OUTPUT SPEED RESTART DELAY RESISTOR TTC  SYNC AT MAX FREQ
PWM FREQUENCY PWM TECHNIQUE  DC BRAKE VOLTS
SYNCHRO SCAN V/F
 CUR RATE LIMIT COST OF ENERGY  DC BRAKE TRIGGER
SYNC SETUP TIME
PEAK CURRENT LEVEL RESET ENERGY  BRAKE ON STOP
SYNC SCAN TIME
REGEN TORQUE LIMIT FILTER TYPE  BRAKE ON REVERSE
SYNC RECOVER
FILTER SOURCE  STOP BRAKE TIME
Drive Configure FILTER DESTINATION  BRAKE ON START Auto Tune
SPEED UNITS FILTER CUTOFF  START BRAKE TIME ANALOG OFFSET TRIM
FACTORY SETTINGS NOTCH CENTER FREQUENCY  ONE-STEP TUNING
LANGUAGE SELECT NOTCH BAND Process Control STATOR R1 TUNE
CLEAR FAULT LOG PROCESS TYPE  MEASURE Xm (ROT)
SECURITY Motor Data SETPOINT ADJUST LIMIT  MEASURE LEAKAGE
ACCESS TIMEOUT MOTOR RATED VOLT PROCESS FEEDBACK  CURRENT LOOP TUNE
ACCESS CODE MOTOR RATED AMPS SETPOINT SOURCE  FLUX CURRENT TUNE
ACTIVE PARAMETER TABLE MOTOR RATED SPEED SETPOINT COMMAND
 DEAD TIME COMP MOTOR RATED FREQUENCY PROCESS ERROR TOLERANCE
POWER INPUT MOTOR MAG AMPS PROCESS PROP GAIN
ENCODER COUNTS PROCESS INT GAIN
Drive Protect RESOLVER SPEED PROCESS INT CLAMP
EXTERNAL TRIP ELECT SLIP FREQUENCY PROCESS DIFF GAIN
 FOLLOWING ERROR CALCULATE MOTOR MODEL PROFILE ADJUST
 TORQUE PROVING  INSTABILITY FREQUENCY PROFILE ADJUST BAND
FEEDBACK LOSS  STABILITY GAIN PROCESS SLEEP BAND
 FOLDBACK GAIN REVERSE MOTOR ROTATION PROCESS OUTPUT FILTER
OVERLOAD PROCESS OUTPUT OFFSET
 OVERLOAD TRIGGER PROCESS OUTPUT GAIN
SINGLE PHASING
OVER TEMPERATURE Skip Frequency
 SKIP FREQ 1
 SKIP BAND 1
 SKIP FREQ 2
 SKIP BAND 2
 SKIP FREQ 3
 SKIP BAND 3

Only available or active in Closed Loop Vector mode. Ignore these parameters for Open Loop Vector and V/F modes.
 Only available or active in V/F mode. Ignore these parameters for Open Loop Vector mode.
 Only available or active in either Vector mode. Ignore these parameters for V/F mode.

Only available or active in V/F mode or Open Loop Vector modes.
Only shown if feedback device is present.
Only shown if Resolver feedback device is present.

4‐16 Programming & Operation MN740


Table 4‐1 List of Parameters Continued
Level 3 Blocks
Profile Run Custom Units PLC Mode Composite REF RTC Features
NUMBER OF CYCLES MAX DEC PLACES PLC Config 1-16 Parameter A Number RTC Action 1
PR RESTART MODE VALUE AT SPEED Compare A Parameter Parameter B Number RTC Action 2
SPEED CURVE 1-7 UNITS OF MEASURE Compare A Constant Parameter A Function RTC Message 1
PROFILE TIME 1-7 Compare B Parameter Parameter B Function RTC Message 2
Compare B Constant Function RTC Counter MAX
Timer A Duration Operator DST Select
Timer B Duration Parameter A Gain
Parameter B Gain

Table 4‐2 Level 1 Parameter Block Definitions


Block Title Parameter Description
PRESET Preset Speeds Allows selection of 15 predefined motor operating speeds.
SPEEDS #1 - #15 Each speed may be selected using external switches connected to terminals at J2.
For motor operation, a motor direction command must be given along with a preset speed command.
RAMP RATES Accel Time #1,2 Accel time is the number of seconds required for the motor to increase at a linear rate from 0 to “Max Output
Speed” parameter in the Level 2 Output Limits block.
Decel Time #1,2 Decel time is the number of seconds required for the motor to decrease at a linear rate from the speed specified
in the “Max Output Speed” to 0.
Start S‐Accel #1,2 Start S‐Curve Acceleration as a percentage of max speed (% 1 and 2)
End S‐Accel #1,2 End S‐Curve Acceleration as a percentage of max speed (% 1 and 2)
Start S‐Decel #1,2 Start S‐Curve Deceleration as a percentage of max speed (% 1 and 2)
End S‐Decel #1,2 End S‐Curve Deceleration as a percentage of max speed (% 1 and 2)

Figure 4‐2 S-Curve Example


% Maximum Commanded Speed
100
Speed Speed
80 Curve Speed
60 (Accel) Curve
40 (Decel)
20
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Seconds
-20
-40
Start End Start End
S-Accel S-Accel S-Decel S-Decel
Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1
1 1 1 1

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐17


Table 4‐2 Level 1 Parameter Block Definitions ‐ Continued
Block Title Parameter Description
JOG SETTINGS Jog Speed Jog Speed is the programmed speed used during jog. Jog can be initiated from the keypad or terminal strip. At
the Keypad, press the JOG key then press and hold the direction (FWD or REV). For Standard Run 3Wire
mode, close the JOG input (J2-12) at the terminal strip then close and maintain the direction input (J2-9 or
J2-10). Process Control mode operation is different. If the terminal strip Process Control Enable input
(J2-13) is closed, pressing the Keypad JOG key (or closing J2-14) will cause the drive to move in the
direction of the error (without pressing FWD or REV).
Jog Accel Time The accel rate or time to reach Jog Speed. Time=(Jog Speed/Max Speed) x (Jog Accel Time)
Jog Decel Time The decel rate or time to decel from Jog Speed. Time=(Jog Speed/Max Speed) x (Jog Decel Time)
Jog Start S‐Accel Start S‐Curve Acceleration as a percentage of max speed (% 1 and 2)
Jog End S‐Accel End S‐Curve Acceleration as a percentage of max speed (% 1 and 2)
Jog Start S‐Decel Start S‐Curve Deceleration as a percentage of max speed (% 1 and 2)
Jog End S‐Decel End S‐Curve Deceleration as a percentage of max speed (% 1 and 2)
Jog Forward Enables Jog in the drive forward direction at Jog speed for keypad mode.
Jog Reverse Enables Jog in the drive reverse direction at Jog speed for keypad mode.
KEYPAD SETUP Stop Key OFF Keypad STOP key is not active.
ON Allows keypad STOP key to initiate motor stop during remote or serial operation. If active, pressing STOP
selects Local mode and initiates the stop command.
Stop Mode Selects if the Stop command causes the motor to COAST to a stop or REGEN to a stop. In COAST, the motor is turned
off and allowed to coast to a stop. In REGEN, the voltage and frequency to the motor is reduced at a rate set
by Decel Time.
Run Forward OFF disables FWD key in Local mode.
ON makes the keypad FWD key active in Local mode.
Run Reverse OFF disables REV key in Local mode.
ON makes the keypad REV key active in Local mode.
Switch on Fly OFF disables Switch on Fly.
ON Allows switching between Local and Remote while Control is on.
Loc. Hot Start OFF disables the Stop input at J2-11 in the keypad operating mode.
ON enables the Stop input at J2-11 in the keypad operating mode.
Speed Increment Sets the increment of speed change for each key press. (1-3600RPM or 0-60Hz)
Init Local Speed At power up, initializes the local speed to 0RPM, the last speed before power down or at Set Speed parameter.
Set Speed At power up, initializes the local speed to this preset value if “Init Local Speed” =Set Speed.
Parameters to Keypad Transfers the parameter settings stored in the control memory (flash) to keypad memory.
Download Select Selects parameters to download (All, Motor or Other) with the Keypad to Params #1312 parameter.
All=All parameters, Motor=Motor parameters only, Other=All parameters except Motor parameters.
Keypad to Parameters Transfers the parameter settings stored in keypad memory to the control memory (flash).
Keypad Contrast Sets LCD contrast: 0=dimmest, 100=brightest.
Backlight Turns On/Off the backlight for the keypad display.
(Closed/Open Local Torque Mode OFF disables local torque mode.
Vector Only) ON enables local torque mode operation.
Local Torque Ref Local torque mode reference value.

4‐18 Programming & Operation MN740


Table 4‐2 Level 1 Parameter Block Definitions ‐ Continued
Block Title Parameter Description
INPUT SETUP Operating Mode Operating Modes are: Keypad, Standard Run 2 and 3 wire, 15 Preset Speeds, Fan&Pump 2 and 3 Wire, Process
Control, 3 SPD ANA 2 and 3 Wire, EPOT 2 and 3 Wire, Network, Profile Run, 15 Preset Positions, Bipolar,
Pulse Follower and PLC. External connections to the control are made at the control terminal strip (wiring
diagrams are shown in Section 3 “Operating Modes”).
Command Source Selects the external speed reference to be used.
None, Command Source is not used.
Analog In1, Connect a 10K pot at J1 or connect a 0-10VDC signal to J1-2 and J1-1.
Analog In2, Connect a 0-5V, 0-10V, ±5V, ±10V, 0-20mA or 4‐20mA source to J1-4 and 5.
4‐20mA should be considered when a long distance (up to 50 ft) between the external device and J1-4 and 5
of the control is necessary.
Keypad, Command is from Keypad.
Network, Signal source is from a device on the network.
Composite, the result of the Level 3 Composite Reference set by the user.
EXB Pulse Follower, Signal source is from the EXB Pulse Follower expansion board.
ANA IN1 TYPE None, input not used.
Potentiometer (0-10V signal is used).
ANA IN1 INVERT Off - will cause a low input voltage (e.g. 0VDC) to be a low motor speed command and a maximum input voltage (e.g.
10VDC) to be a maximum motor speed command.
On - will cause a low input voltage (e.g. 0VDC) to be a maximum motor speed command and a maximum input voltage
(e.g. 10VDC) to be a low motor speed command.
ANA IN1 GAIN Allows 0 to 300% gain to be applied (as in Y=Gain*(X-Offset)).
ANA IN1 OFFSET Provides an offset to the Analog Input to minimize signal drift. For example, if the minimum speed signal is 1VDC
(instead of 0VDC) the ANA CMD Offset can be set to ‐10% so the minimum voltage input is seen by the
control as 0VDC. This parameter is automatically adjusted during the auto tune CMD Offset Trim test.
ANA IN1 FILTER Amount of signal filtering to use, 0=No filtering, 6= Max filtering.
ANA IN2 TYPE Define signal to be used, None, ±5V, ±10V, 0-20mA or 4‐20mA, 0-10V and 0-5V.
ANA IN2 INVERT Off - will cause a low input voltage (e.g. 0VDC) to be a low motor speed command and a maximum input voltage (e.g.
10VDC) to be a maximum motor speed command.
On - will cause a low input voltage (e.g. 0VDC) to be a maximum motor speed command and a maximum input voltage
(e.g. 10VDC) to be a low motor speed command.
ANA IN2 GAIN Allows 0 to 300% gain to be applied (as in Y=Gain*(X-offset)).
ANA IN2 OFFSET Provides an offset to the Analog Input to minimize signal drift. For example, if the minimum speed signal is 1VDC
(instead of 0VDC) the ANA CMD Offset can be set to ‐10% so the minimum voltage input is seen by the control as
0VDC. This parameter is automatically adjusted during the auto tune CMD Offset Trim test.
ANA IN2 DEADBAND Allows a defined range of voltage to be a deadband. A command signal within this range will not affect the control
output. The deadband value is the voltage above and below the zero command signal level.
ANA IN2 FILTER Amount of signal filtering to use, 0=No filtering, 6= Max filtering.
Sleep Mode Disables the control when Command Source is less than CMD Sleep Band (parameter #1417).
Active in all speed modes.
CMD Sleep Band Sets the speed command limit for sleep mode. 0.00% disables Sleep Mode.
(Closed/Open EXT. CURRENT LIMIT Off - No input current limit.
Vector Only) On - Uses Current Limit Source (P1415) as the external signal source for current limiting in speed mode.
CURRENT LIMIT Selects the external speed reference to be used.
SOURCE None, Turns off external current limit.
Analog In1, Connect a 10K pot at J1 or connect a 0-10VDC signal to J1-2 and J1-1.
Analog In2, Connect a 0-5V, 0-10V, ±5V, ±10V, 0-20mA or 4‐20mA source to J1-4 and 5.
4‐20mA should be considered when a long distance (up to 50 ft) between the external device and J1-4 and 5
of the control is necessary.
Keypad, Turns off external current limit.
Composite, see section 9 for more information.
Torque FF Source Keypad uses Local Keypad Torque Reference as feedforward.

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐19


Table 4‐2 Level 1 Parameter Block Definitions ‐ Continued
Block Title Parameter Description
OUTPUT SETUP Digital Output 1,2 Four digital outputs are available (2 optically isolated and 2 relay).
Each output may be configured to any of the following conditions:
Relay Output 1,2 Condition Description
Drive Ready ‐ Active after soft start, when drive is enabled and no faults are present.
Drive On ‐ (V/F) Active when drive is “Ready” and producing PWM to motor.
(Vector) Active when drive is “Ready” and motor flux is present.
Drive Run ‐ Active when drive is “On” and a FWD/REV direction command is present.
Drive Stopped ‐ Active when stop command is present and motor is stopped (or coasting to stop).
Jog ‐ Active during Jog mode.
Accelerate ‐ Active when control is accelerating.
Constant Speed ‐ Active when control speed is constant.
Decelerate ‐ Active when control is decelerating.
At Zero Speed ‐ Active when motor speed is less than the Level 1 Output Setup “Zero SPD Set Pt”.
At Speed ‐ Active when motor speed is within band set by the Level 1 Output Setup “At Speed
Band (P1506)”.
At Set Speed ‐ Active when output speed is at or greater than the Level 1 Output Setup “Set Speed
Point (P1507)”.
Current Overload ‐ Active when motor current is greater than “Overload Set Point”.
Current Underload ‐ Active when motor current is less than “Underload Set Point”.
I2T Overload ‐ Active when overload left is less than 100%.
Keypad Control ‐ Active when control is in Local keypad control.
Dynamic Brake ‐ Active when Dynamic Brake transistor is turned ON.
Foldback ‐ Active when current foldback is active.
Fault ‐ Active when a fault condition is present (will cause trip).
Alarm ‐ Active when an Alarm condition is present (but doesn't cause trip).
Command Forward ‐ Active during forward run command.
Command Reverse ‐ Active during reverse run command.
Motor Forward ‐ Active when motor is moving in Drive forward direction.
Motor Reverse ‐ Active when motor is moving in Drive reverse direction.
Process Error ‐ Active when absolute process error is greater than P2606 (Process Error Tolerance).
Network - Active when commanded by network (Modbus). Network device controls this output.
At Position - Active when load is at position (Position error≤P#1517) AND Motor Speed≤P#1505.
In Motion - Active when load is moving (Position error>P#1517) AND Motor Speed>P#1505.
PLC - Output is controlled by PLC mode.
RTC - Output is controlled by RTC module.
Powered Up - Active when Bus is “UP” and no faults are present.
Zero SPD Set PT Zero speed opto output is active when the speed is less than the ZERO SPD SET PT, the opto output
becomes active. This is useful when a motor brake is to interlock operation with a motor.
At Speed Band At Speed opto output is active when the magnitude of (Speed Ref)-(Speed Demand) is less than P1506.
Set Speed Point Sets the speed that the AT Set Speed digital output becomes active (turns on). When the speed is greater
than the Level 1 Output SET SPEED parameter, the digital output becomes active. This is useful when
another machine must not start or stop until the motor exceeds a predetermined speed.
Overload Set Point Sets the motor current value at which the Overload digital output is active.
Underload Set Point Sets the motor current value at which the Underload digital output is active.

4‐20 Programming & Operation MN740


Table 4‐2 Level 1 Parameter Block Definitions ‐ Continued
Block Title Parameter Description
OUTPUT SETUP Analog Out 1, 2 Signal * Speed Ref ‐ Scaled value of speed reference input to velocity profiler (ACC/DEC ramp).
Continued Source Selection Speed Demand ‐ Scaled value of speed reference output of velocity profiler (ACC/DEC ramp).
Acc/Dec ‐ Scaled value of ACC/DEC rate, range is from 0 to max ACC/DEC rate.
Motor Current ‐ Scaled value of Motor Current, range is based on 2 times drive FLA.
(Includes both mag and load currents).
MAG Current ‐ Scaled value of magnetizing current, range is based on 2 times drive FLA.
MAG Current Command ‐ The commanded D-axis PI vector magnetizing current to the current controller,
range is based on 2 times drive FLA.
Load Current ‐ Scaled value of the load amps, range is based on 2 times drive FLA.
Load Current Command ‐ The commanded Q-axis PI vector load current to the current controller, range is
based on 2 times drive FLA.
Power Factor‐ Scaled value of power factor, range is from 0 to 1.0.
PH1 Current ‐ Scaled value of the phase 1 motor current, range is based on 2 times drive FLA.
PH2 Current ‐ Scaled value of the phase 2 motor current, range is based on 2 times drive FLA.
PH3 Current ‐ Scaled value of the phase 3 motor current, range is based on 2 times drive FLA.
Motor Voltage ‐ Scaled value of the motor voltage, range is based on P2401.
VD Demand ‐ Flux controller output. Used to diagnose control problems.
VQ Demand ‐ Load controller output. Used to diagnose control problems.
Bus Voltage ‐ Scaled value of the Bus voltage. (Range is based on 325V for 240V drives, 650V
for 480V controls and 813Vdc for 600V controls.)
ABS Torque ‐ Scaled value of the absolute torque, range is based on peak torque
(2 x rated torque).
Torque ‐ Scaled value of the motor torque (signed), range is based on peak torque
(2 x rated torque).
Control Temp ‐ Scaled value of the control heatsink temperature, range is -50 to 150C.
Analog Input 1 ‐ Scaled value of the analog input 1 signal value.
Analog Input 2 ‐ Scaled value of the analog input 2 signal value, range depends on input type
P1408.
OPT1 ANA IN1 ‐ Scaled value of option board 1 analog input 1 signal value, range depends on
input type selected.
OPT1 ANA IN2 ‐ Scaled value of option board 1 analog input 2 signal value, range depends on
input type selected.
OPT2 ANA IN1 ‐ Scaled value of option board 2 analog input 1 signal value, range depends on
input type selected.
OPT2 ANA IN2 ‐ Scaled value of option board 2 analog input 2 signal value, range depends on
input type selected.
PROC Feedforward - Scaled value of the process feedforward signal, range is -100% to 100% of
Process Feedforward signal.
PROC Feedback ‐ Scaled value of the process feedback signal, range is -100% to 100% of Process
Feedback signal.
PROC Setpoint ‐ Scaled value of the process setpoint source, range is -100% to 100% of Process
Setpoint signal.
Electric Angle ‐ Scaled value of the electrical angle of shaft, range is from 0-359 degrees.
ABS Speed ‐ Scaled value (absolute) of actual motor speed, range is 0 to Max Motor Speed
P2003.
Velocity ‐ Scaled value (signed) of actual motor speed, range is - Max Motor Speed to +Max
Motor Speed P2003.
Network ‐ Represents the network speed reference, see MN744.
Analog 1 holding register is 40102:40101
Analog 2 holding register is 40104:40103
Composite Ref - Scaled value of the Composite Reference output, range is -100% to 100% of
composite reference calculation.
Power (kW) Scaling power calculated using the nominal output amps and RMS output volts.
Calibrate ‐ Produces maximum value of selected analog output type.
Analog Out 1 Type Sets the output signal (0-5V, 0-10V, 4-20mA or 0-20mA).
Analog Out 2 Type Sets the output signal (±5V, ±10V).
Analog Out #1 & 2 Gain Scale factor for analog output (as in Y=Gain*X).
Calibrate Analog Output Scalable output signal used to calibrate output device (-100% to 100% of Analog Out 1 Type).
At Position Band Load is at target position (Position Feedback < Band)
Note: * Example Speed output: Bipolar output range is -MAX Speed to +Max Speed. Unipolar output range is 0
to MAX Speed. Bipolar parameter with unipolar output, 0V=(-MAX) to max output = (+MAX).

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐21


Table 4‐2 Level 1 Parameter Block Definitions ‐ Continued
Block Title Parameter Description
MOTOR (All) Control Type Sets the control type to V/F Control, Open Vector or Closed Vector.
CONTROL When changed from Closed to Open Vector, the Level 2, Motor Control, Speed Int, Speed Diff and
Speed Prop gains may need to be reduced (since open vector performance bandwidths are less than
for closed vector).
Control Base Speed The speed at which Field Weakening begins. Typically set to motor rated speed.
(V/F Only) Control Base Volt Voltage that represents base speed. Typically set to motor rated speed.
Static Boost Additional voltage applied to motor at start-up.
Dynamic Boost Cut In Speed at which dynamic boost takes full effect.
Dynamic Boost The Dynamic Boost parameter can be adjusted to provide more or less running torque from the motor
than is available with the factory setting. The boost adjustment alters the output voltage to the motor from
the normal voltage value by increasing or decreasing the voltage per frequency unit as defined by the
V/F profile.
V/F Efficiency Smooths transitions between static boost and V/F curve.
V/F Profile Sets the Volts/Frequency ratio of the control output (to the motor) for all values of output voltage versus
output frequency up to the control base frequency. Because motor voltage is related to motor current,
motor voltage can then be related to motor torque. A change in the V/F profile can adjust how much
torque is available from the motor at various speeds. 0=Linear, 100=Quadratic
3 Point Method 3PT profile - allows two linear V/F segments by setting the V/F 3PT Volts and V/F 3PT Frequency
parameters, see Figure 4‐3.
3 Point Voltage The output voltage associated with the 3PT Frequency parameter.
3 Point Frequency The output frequency associated with the 3PT Volts parameter.
Slip Comp Enable Compensates for varying load conditions during normal operation to maintain constant rotor speed.
(Closed/Open Current PROP Gain Sets the current loop proportional gain.
Vector Only) * Current INT Gain Sets the current loop integral gain.
Speed PROP Gain Sets the speed (velocity) loop proportional gain. Excessive speed prop gain will cause ringing around
the set point. Decreasing the speed prop gain will result in slower response and decrease the ringing, but
will increase the overshoot.
Speed INT Gain Sets the speed (velocity) loop integral gain.
Speed DIFF Gain Sets the speed (velocity) loop differential gain.
A.S. Prop Gain Sets the anti-saturation proportional gain.
A.S. Integral Gain Sets the anti-saturation integral gain.
Motor XM Sets the Motor magnetizing reactance value.
Motor R1 Sets the Motor stator resistance value.
Motor X1 Sets the Motor stator leakage reactance value.
Motor R2 Sets the Motor rotor resistance value.
Motor X2 Sets the Motor rotor reactance value.
Rotor Time Constant Sets the rotor time constant value.
COMMUNICA‐ Baud Rate Sets the communication baud rate.
TION Parity Sets communication parity.
Stop Bits Sets the number of stop bits to use.
Drive Address Sets the drive address for communication.
OPT Card Reset Sends a power up reset command to all expansion boards, slot 1 only, or slot 2 only.
Security Default Restores factory settings to Browser User ID and Password.
Browser User ID ASCII user ID for the Ethernet Web Browser Option Board if installed.
Browser Password Password for the Ethernet Web Browser Option Board if installed.
Note: Refer to MN751 for more details about the optional WebBrowser board and parameters.
* These values are set during auto tuning. Performance may be affected if the value of these parameters is changed after auto tuning.
Figure 4‐3 Volts/Hertz Profile
V/F Profile Curve 3 Point Method Curve
Max Output Max Out‐
put
Output

0%
Volts

Output Volts

50
% 3 PT
100 Volts 3 PT
Static % Base Static Base
Freq.
Boost Output Frequency Freq. Boost Output Frequency Freq

4‐22 Programming & Operation MN740


Table 4‐3 Level 2 Parameter Block Definitions
Block Title Parameter Description
DRIVE LIMITS Operating Zone Sets the PWM operating zone to Standard 2.5kHz or Quiet 8.0kHz output carrier frequency. Two
operating modes are available: Constant Torque and Variable Torque.
Constant Torque allows 175% for 3 seconds and 150% for 60 seconds of peak overload capacity.
Variable Torque allows 115% peak overload for 60 seconds.
MIN Output Speed Sets the minimum motor speed in RPM. During operation, the motor speed will not decrease below this
value except for motor starts or during dynamic braking to a stop.
MAX Output Speed Sets the maximum motor speed in RPM.
PWM Frequency The switch frequency of the output transistors. PWM (pulse width modulation) frequency is also referred to
as “Carrier” frequency. PWM should be as low as possible to minimize stress on the output transistors and
motor windings. It is recommended that the PWM frequency be set to approximately 15 times the maximum
output frequency of the control. Ratios less than 15 will result in non‐Sinusoidal current waveforms.
Note: Derate output current by 30% for operation between 8.5KHz and 16KHz.
REGEN Torque Limit Sets the maximum motor current (not including MAG current) allowed during regen.
Peak Current Level (V/F) Sets the motor current (including MAG current) where foldback begins.
(Vector) Sets maximum motor current level for operation.
(Closed/Open Current Rate Limit Limits the rate of torque change in response to a torque command. This parameter sets the time in
Vector Only) seconds to change the output torque by 1 times motor rated torque.
Caution: Do not set Level 2, Drive Configure, Power Input parameter to Common Bus if AC power is connected
to L1, L2 or L3. Common Bus requires numerous changes, contact Baldor for information.
Block Title Parameter Description
DRIVE Speed Units Sets units to Hz or RPM.
CONFIGURE Factory Settings Restores factory settings (over writes all stored values) for all four parameter tables.
Language Select English and one language can be stored (Spanish, German, Italian, French and Portuguese).
Use Workbench to load other languages as required.
Security Enable security.
Access Timeout If security is enabled and program mode is entered, the access code must be correctly entered. After
parameters are changed this timer begins to timeout. If program mode is accessed after timeout, the
security code must be entered a second time.
Access Code Sets security code for login required to access locked parameters.
Active Parameter Table Selects parameter table for use (T1, T2, T3 or T4).
Note: This parameter is not actually in the Level 2 Blocks. It is Parameter 0052 in the Monitor
block if accessing using Mint.
Clear Fault Log Deletes all fault log entries.
Dead Time Compensation (V/F only) Compensates for voltage loss due to switching dead time at the PWM output.
Power Input The Power base senses the control power base (single or three phase). If connecting a three phase
control to a single phase power source, change value from 3 to 0 to avoid “Loss of Phase” trips.
0-Single Phase - The output values are derated for single phase operation.
Note: For three phase power input, if a phase is lost this parameter will automatically be changed
to single phase and the control will automatically be derated for single phase operation.
1-Common bus slave - selected when only DC input power (master) is available. Do not choose if AC power
is connected. Common bus setting disables precharge and soft start features of the control.
2-Three Phase - Standard operation.
3-Common bus master - is selected for special installations, three phase with common bus slave support.
Execute Macro 0-Don't execute a macro. 1- Execute macro 1 (default name=M1). 2- Execute macro 2 (default
name=M2). 3- Execute macro 3 (default name=M3). 4- Execute macro 4 (default name=M4).
5- Execute macro 5 (default name=M5).
Undo Macro 0- Don't undo macro. 1- P#116 is read and that macro is undone (factory settings are restored for values
modified by that macro).
BUS Volt Filter Sets the cutoff frequence for the BUS Voltage Filter (used to demodulate the BUS).
DRIVE External Trip OFF ‐ External Trip is Disabled.
PROTECT ON ‐ External Trip is enabled. If a normally closed contact at J2-16 is opened, an External Trip fault will
occur and cause the drive to shut down.
Overload Sets how the control handles I2T power overloads. When an overload occurs it will either Fault, Foldback,
Or Hold based on the control output AMPS.
Single Phasing (3 phase units Fault - When input power phase is lost for approximately 10 cycles, control trips on fault.
only) Derate - When an input power phase is lost, single phase operation is assumed and control output is
derated by 50% and operation is allowed at the reduced output.
Over Temperature Fault - When control temperature reaches 85°C, control trips on fault.
Derate - When control temperature reaches 80°C (standard or 90°C quiet mode), output is derated by 30%
(current limiting) and operation is allowed at the reduced value. Operation at full current is allowed when
control temperature decreases to 70°C. If control temperature increases to 85°C, control trips on fault.

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐23


Table 4‐3 Level 2 Parameter Block Definitions Continued
Block Title Parameter Description
DRIVE PROTECT Following Error OFF ‐ Control ignores “At Speed Error” from the process.
Continued ON ‐ Control monitors the following error from the process. If the process speed is outside the range set in
(Closed/Open Vector the Level 1 Output block, AT Speed Band parameter, the drive will fault and will disable.
Only) Torque Proving OFF ‐ Control ignores unbalanced motor phases.
ON ‐ Control looks for balanced output current in all three phases to the motor. Unbalanced output current
will cause a trip and create a torque proving fault. This occurs only at first drive enable after power up.
(V/F Only) Foldback Gain Sets the change in frequency during overcurrent conditions.
Overload Trigger Sets the trigger point for an overload condition.
MISCELLAN‐ Auto Restart Manual
EOUS Power Up Start - If set to MAN and a run command (enable line & FWD or REV command) is present at
power up, the motor will not run. The run command must be removed then reapplied to start operation.
The run command refers to the enable plus direction (FWD or REV) lines.
Restart after Fault - If a fault occurs during operation, the control must be reset and the run command
must be removed then reapplied to start operation.
Note: If Restart Fault/Hr. is zero, the control must be manually reset. If Restart Fault/Hr. is
non-zero, the control will automatically attempt to reset the fault but will not restart until the
run command is removed then reapplied to start operation.
Automatic
At Power Up - If a run command (enable line & FWD or REV command) is present at power up, the
control will automatically start. Auto restarts enabled at power up but disabled after a fault.
After Fault - If a fault occurs during operation, the control will automatically reset (after the restart delay
time) to resume operation if the Fault/Hr is set to a non zero value. Auto restarts disabled at power up
but enabled after a fault.
Both - Auto restarts active at power up and after faults.
3 Wire modes, AUTO start after a fault or loss of power will not occur because the momentary contacts
are open and the run command must again be applied. The run command refers to the enable plus
direction (FWD or REV) lines.
Restarts/Hr The maximum number of automatic restart attempts before requiring a manual restart. After one hour without
reaching the maximum number of faults or if power is turned off and on again, the fault count is reset to zero.
Restart Delay The amount of time allowed after a fault condition for an automatic restart to occur.
Useful to allow sufficient time to clear a fault condition before restart is attempted.
PWM Technique Sets the method used to generate the motor voltage PWM signal, Space Vector or Sine Triangle.
Cost of Energy Sets the billing cost per KWH charged by the local power utility.
Reset Energy Resets the energy counter (in power base of the control).
Filter Type Sets the auxiliary filter to None, Low pass, High Pass or Notch.
Filter Source Sets the auxiliary filter source to None, Raw speed, Torque, Analog IN1 or Analog IN2, Composite.
Filter Destination Sets the out put of the filter to None, Speed Loop, Torque Loop, Speed Feedforward, Process Feedback,
Process Feedforward, or Process Setpoint.
Filter Cutoff Sets the cutoff frequency of the auxiliary filter (a low value = slower response).
Notch Center Frequency Sets the center frequency for the notch filter (if Filter Type=Notch).
Notch Band Sets the frequency band of the notch filter (if Filter Type=Notch).

4‐24 Programming & Operation MN740


Table 4‐3 Level 2 Parameter Block Definitions Continued
Block Title Parameter Description
MOTOR DATA Motor Rated Volt The rated voltage of the motor (listed on the motor nameplate).
Motor Rated Amps The rated current of the motor (listed on the motor nameplate). If the motor current exceeds this value for a
period of time, a Motor Overload fault will occur.
Motor Rated Speed The rated speed of the motor (listed on the motor nameplate). If Motor Rated SPD = 1750 RPM and Motor
Rated Freq = 60 Hz, the Keypad Display will show 1750 RPM at 60 Hz and 875 RPM at 30Hz at full load.
Motor Rated Frequency The rated frequency of the motor (listed on the motor nameplate).
Motor Mag Amps The motor magnetizing current value (listed on the motor nameplate) also called no load current. Measure
using a clamp on amp meter at the AC power line while the motor is running at line frequency with no
load connected to the motor shaft.
Elect Slip Frequency Sets the rated slip frequency of the motor.
Calculate Motor Model NO ‐ No presets are calculated.
YES ‐ This procedure loads preset values into memory that are required to perform auto tune.
Always run Calculate Motor Model Parameters as the first step of auto tune.
Reverse Rotation Reverse direction of motor rotation without rewiring the motor or encoder wires.
Note: In position mode, if the feedback alignment parameter is changed, the motor will continue to
rotate in the same direction for a given position reference. However, if the encoder wires are
swapped, motor rotation will reverse.
(V/F Only) Instability Frequency If the motor exhibits instability (usually no load) this parameter should be set to the center of the instability
band.
Stability Gain Sets the amount of correction to stabilize the motor.
BRAKE ADJUST Resistor Ohms The dynamic braking resistor value in ohms. Refer to dynamic braking manual for additional information.
Resistor Watts The dynamic braking resistor watts rating.
Resistor Thermal Time Constant Sets the time for heat dissipation for the dynamic braking resistor. If 2X watts is dissipated continuously
“Regen R Fault” will occur in the time set by this parameter. If 3x watts is dissipated continuously,
“Regen R Fault” will occur in 1/2 the time set by this parameter.
(V/F Only) DC Brake Volts The amount of DC braking voltage applied to the motor windings during a stop command. Increase this
value for more braking torque during stops. The increased braking voltage may cause the motor to
overheat for applications that require frequent starts/stops. Be careful in selecting this value.
The maximum DC Brake Voltage = (1.414)X(Max Output Volts).
DC Brake Trigger The frequency at which dc injection braking will begin.
Brake On Stop If set to ON, DC injection braking will begin when a stop command is issued. After a stop command, the DC
brake voltage will be applied to the motor windings when the output frequency reaches the DC brake
trigger.
Brake On Reverse If set to ON, DC injection braking will begin after a change‐motor‐rotation command is issued. After a stop
command, the DC brake voltage will be applied to the motor windings when the output frequency
reaches the DC brake trigger. Braking continues until the motor is stopped. The motor will then
accelerate in the opposite direction.
Stop Brake Time The maximum number of seconds that DC injection brake voltage will be applied to the motor windings
after a stop command. After the time specified by this value, DC injection braking is automatically turned
off. If DC injection braking starts at a frequency less than the DC brake trigger parameter, the stop
brake time is calculated as follows:
Output Frequency at Braking
Brake Time + Stop Brake Time X
DC Brake Trigger
Brake on Start If set to ON, turns DC injection braking ON for a period of time (Start Brake Time) when a run command is
issued. This ensures the motor is not rotating. Braking will automatically turn off and the motor will
accelerate at the end of the start brake time.
Start Brake Time The amount of time that DC injection braking will be applied after a run command is issued. This will only
occur if brake on start is set to ON. Braking may cause the motor to overheat for applications that
require frequent starts/stops. Be careful in selecting this value. The start brake time should be just long
enough to ensure the motor shaft is not rotating when a start command is issued.
SKIP Skip Freq 1, 2, 3 The center frequency of the frequency band to skip or treat as a dead‐band. Three bands can be defined
FREQUENCY independently or the three values can be selected to skip one wide frequency band.
(V/F Only) Skip Band 1, 2, 3 The width of the band centered about the Skip Frequency. For example, if Skip Frequency #1 is set to 20Hz
and Skip Band #1 is set to 5Hz, continuous operation is not allowed in the dead‐band of 15Hz to 25Hz.

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐25


Table 4‐3 Level 2 Parameter Block Definitions Continued
Block Title Parameter Description
SYNCHRO START Sync at MAX Frequency Allows the Synchro Start feature to begin scanning motor rotational frequency at the MAX Frequency (On)
or at the last speed reference command (Off).
Sync Start FWD Synchro Start feature begins scanning motor rotational frequency in the drive forward direction.
Sync Start REV Synchro Start feature begins scanning motor rotational frequency in the drive reverse direction.
Synchro Scan V/F Sets the Volts/Hertz ratio for the Synchro Start feature as a percentage of the V/F ratio defined by the
“Control Base Volts/Control Base Frequency”. This Sync Scan V/F percentage value is multiplied by the
“Control Base Volts/Control Base Frequency” value. If this value is too high, the inverter may fault on
Over‐current.
Sync Setup Time The time at max frequency (or last reference) before scanning begins. Allows motor currents to settle
before scanning starts. Active in both forward and reverse directions.
Sync Scan Time The time allowed for Synchro Start to scan and detect rotor frequency. Scanning begins at the Start at
MAX Frequency to 0Hz. Generally, the shorter the Sync Scan Time the more likely a false Synchro
Start will be detected. This value should be set high enough to eliminate false Synchro Starts.
Sync Recover Time The time allowed to ramp up the output voltage from the Synchro Start scan voltage to the normal output
voltage. This occurs after the synchronization frequency is detected. This parameter value should be
low enough to minimize Synchro Start time without causing the inverter to fault on Over‐current.
Note: For open vector, set all time parameters to minimum as a starting point.
PROCESS Process Type Sets the type of PID control.
CONTROL None - PID is disabled, however feedforward is always available.
Forward Acting - The process error computed as, PE = (Set Point) - (Feedback).
Useful when feedback increases as motor speed increases.
Reverse Acting - The process error compute as, PE =(Feedback) - (Set Point).
Useful when feedback decreases as motor speed increases.
Setpoint Adjust Limit Set as a percent of motor speed it limits speed corrections due to process error.
Process Feedback Sets the type of signal used for the process feedback signal.
Setpoint Source Sets the source input signal type to which the process feedback will be compared.
If “Setpoint CMD” is selected, the fixed value of the set point is entered in the Setpoint Command
parameter value.
Setpoint Command Sets the value, as a percentage of the process feedback signal, the control will try to maintain by adjusting motor
speed. This is only used when the Setpoint Source is a fixed value “Setpoint CMD” under Setpoint Source.
Process Error Tolerance The operating band within which the Opto or Relay Output is active (turned ON) indicating the process is
within the desired range.
Process PROP Gain Sets the PID loop proportional gain. Determines how much adjustment to motor speed is due to process error.
Process INTG Gain Sets the PID loop Integral gain. Determines how quickly the motor speed is adjusted to correct long term error.
Process INTG Clamp Sets the level of the Integrator clamp as a percentage of maximum motor speed.
Process DIFF Gain Sets the PID loop differential gain. This determines how much adjustment to motor speed is made for
transient error.
Profile Adjust ON - Adjusts the ACC/DEC rate 1 based on process error (P2612). OFF - No adjustment is made.
Profile Adjust Band Active when P2612 is ON. If process error is within this band, ACC/DEC Group 1 is used.
If process error is outside this band, ACC/DEC 2 is used. Useful when the PID's response needs to
differ when process error is small as compared to when it is large.
Process Sleep Band Non-zero - Enables process PID sleep mode. When Process error remains within this band for 5 seconds,
sleep mode is active (control is disabled, motor coasts). If at any time the process error moves out of
this band, sleep mode is terminated and normal PID operation is resumed.
Zero - disables sleep mode.
Process Output Filter Sets the amount of filtering for the PID process output.
Process Output Offset Sets the amount of offset for the PID process output.
Process Output Gain Sets the amount of gain for the PID process output.
AUTO TUNE ANA Offset Trim Measure analog offset for all analog inputs.
Stator R1 Tune Measure Stator resistance.
(Open/Closed One-Step Tuning Perform one step auto tune. (Prompts for “Press Enter” before a rotational test is performed).
Vector Only) Measure Xm (ROT) Measure MAG Reactance.
Measure Leakage Measure leakage reactance and rotor resistance.
Current Loop Tune Tune the current controller loop.
Flux CUR Tune Tune the flux controller loop.

4‐26 Programming & Operation MN740


Table 4‐4 Level 3 Parameter Block Definitions
Block Title Parameter Description
PROFILE RUN Number of Cycles Sets the number of cycles that the profile will automatically run before stopping.
PR Restart Mode Sets the restart mode if Profile Run is interrupted. 0=Restart, 1=Continue.
Speed Curve 1-7 Speed for each curve is set by the value of Preset Speed1 (Speed Curve 1) to Preset Speed7 (Speed Curve 7).
Sets the speed curve direction for the profile (value is 0-3).
0=FWD-ACC/DEC Group1 1=REV-ACC/DEC Group1
2=FWD-ACC/DEC Group2 3=REV-ACC/DEC Group2
Profile Time 1-7 Sets the amount of time Profile Run stays at a preset speed. Time starts when speed is within the At Speed
Band P1506. Acc/Dec times are not included. A setting of zero causes an immediate transition to the next
speed segment after the current segment is within the speed band.
CUSTOM UNITS MAX Decimal Places The number of decimal places for the Custom Units display.
Value At Speed Sets the desired output rate per RPM of motor speed for the Custom Units display. This parameter provides
scaling.
Units of Measure Allows user specified units of measure to be displayed for the Custom Units display. Characters are selected
from display using  and  keys. More characters are available (press MORE “A” on keypad) for
additional characters.
PLC MODE PLC Config 1-16
Compare A Parameter
Compare A Constant Refer to Section 7 of this manual for a description of these parameters.
Compare B Parameter
Compare B Constant
COMPOSITE REF Parameter A Number
Parameter B Number
Parameter A Function
Parameter B Function
Refer to Section 8 of this manual for a description of these parameters.
Function
Operator
Parameter A Gain
Parameter B Gain
RTC FEATURES RTC ACTION 1-2
RTC MESSAGE 1-2
ACTION 1-2 QUALIFIER
MESSAGE 1-2 QUALIFIER
Refer to Section 9 of this manual for a description of these parameters.
ACTION 1-2 DATE/TIME
MESSAGE 1-2 DATE/TIME
RTC COUNTER MAX
DST SELECT

MN740 Programming & Operation 4‐27


4‐28 Programming & Operation MN740
Section 5
Troubleshooting

The Baldor Control requires very little maintenance and should provide years of trouble free operation when
installed and applied correctly. Occasional visual inspection and cleaning should be considered to ensure tight
wiring connections and to remove dust, dirt, or foreign debris which can reduce heat dissipation.
Operational failures or warnings called “Faults” are displayed on the keypad display as they occur. A log of these
faults and the time each occurred is kept in the Event Log. Explanation of the Event log and diagnostic
information is provided later in this section. A trace log for each event stored in the fault log is also kept for
analysis. Troubleshooting information is provided in table format with corrective actions later in this section.
Before attempting to service this equipment, all input power must be removed from the control to avoid the
possibility of electrical shock. The servicing of this equipment should be handled by a qualified electrical service
technician experienced in the area of high power electronics.
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following information before attempting any troubleshooting or
service of the control. Most troubleshooting can be performed using only a digital voltmeter having at least 1
meg Ohm input impedance. In some cases, an oscilloscope with 5 MHZ minimum bandwidth may be useful.
Before contacting Baldor, check that all power and control wiring is correct and installed according to the
recommendations in this manual.

Event Log From the Menu display screen, select Event Log and press enter.
If an error is displayed during operation, press the “Help” key to learn more about the error. If more than one
error was logged, access the Event Log and examine each error Entry at the time of the event to learn more
about the error. Only events that occurred approximately at the time of the event need to be checked.
Older events are probably not related.

Action Description Display Comments


Status Display After power-up the display shows STATUS FWD LOCAL
the Status screen.
159.5V 600RPM
6.2A 20.00HZ

DIAG 600r MAIN

Press Menu Displays top level menu options. STATUS


Press  or  to move cursor over
QUICK SETUP the “EVENT LOG” selection.
PROGRAMMING
EVENT LOG Press Enter to view the event log.
DIAGNOSTICS
DISPLAY OPTIONS
DIAG BACK

Event Log Display Displays error name, EV. LOG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to view next entry.
Entry # and time the
error occurred. Press R to display Trace menu.
LOW INITIAL BUS
LOW INITIAL BUS 0 4-Jul-06 09:35:00 Press A to return to Status Menu.
0 Date
Time
Entry # DD/MM/YY STATUS TRACE
HH:MM
0-9

MN740 Troubleshooting 5‐1


Trace Trace is used to display control conditions present at the time the fault occurred. Input states, Output states,
various voltage and current values etc. can be viewed to help understand the cause of the fault condition. Each
event in the Event log has its own Fault Trace displays that were captured when that event occurred. Scroll
through the event log to the event you wish to investigate.

Action Description Display Comments


Event Log Display Displays error name, EV. LOG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to view next entry.
Entry # and time the
error occurred. Press R to display Fault Trace.
LOW INITIAL BUS
LOW INITIAL BUS 3 4-Jul-06 09:42:00 Press A to return to Status Menu.
0 Date
Time
Entry # DD/MM/YY STATUS TRACE
HH:MM
0-9

Trace Displays

Action Description Display Comments


Event Log Display Press  or  to scroll to the EV. LOG STOP LOCAL Press R (or press Enter) to show
event you want to investigate. the Fault Trace for the event.
LOW INITIAL BUS
3 4-Jul-06 09:42:00

STATUS TRACE

Fault Trace Display The Fault Latch word is EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
displayed.
This is a hex value.
FAULT LATCH
0x=Hexadecimal 0x0000
0b=Binary The T0003 indicates the Fault
Trace for event 3 of the event log
STATUS T0003 BACK is displayed.

FAULT LATCH Word Interpretation


Hexadecimal Binary Description
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 No Fault
0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 Motor Phase U upper Transistor
0002 0000 0000 0000 0010 Motor Phase U lower Transistor
0004 0000 0000 0000 0100 Motor Phase V lower Transistor
0008 0000 0000 0000 1000 Motor Phase V upper Transistor
0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 Motor Phase W lower Transistor
0020 0000 0000 0010 0000 Motor Phase W upper Transistor
0040 0000 0000 0100 0000 Brake Desaturation Fault
0080 0000 0000 1000 0000 Brake igbt fault
0100 0000 0001 0000 0000 Not Used
0200 0000 0010 0000 0000 Not Used
0400 0000 0100 0000 0000 Ground Fault
0800 0000 1000 0000 0000 Over Current Fault (Active Low)
1000 0001 0000 0000 0000 Pulse by Pulse fault on Motor Phase 1
2000 0010 0000 0000 0000 Pulse by Pulse fault on Motor Phase 2
4000 0100 0000 0000 0000 Pulse by Pulse fault on Motor Phase 3
8000 1000 0000 0000 0000 Inverter Desaturation Fault

5‐2 Troubleshooting MN740


Trace Displays Continued

Action Description Display Comments


Fault Trace Display The Alarm Latch word is also EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
displayed. The T0003 indicates
the Fault Trace for event 3 of the
ALARM LATCH
event log is displayed. 0x0000
This is a hex value.

STATUS T0003 BACK

ALARM LATCH Word Interpretation


Hexadecimal Binary Description
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 No Alarm
0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 Fan Alarm
0002 0000 0000 0000 0010 Motor Over Temperature
0004 0000 0000 0000 0100 Phase Loss
0008 0000 0000 0000 1000 Line Loss
0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 Line Sag
0020 0000 0000 0010 0000 Power Supply Alarm
0040 0000 0000 0100 0000 Not Used
0080 0000 0000 1000 0000 Powerbase in pulse-by-pulse limiting
0100 0000 0001 0000 0000 Not Used
0200 0000 0010 0000 0000 Not Used
0400 0000 0100 0000 0000 Not Used
0800 0000 1000 0000 0000 Not Used
1000 0001 0000 0000 0000 Not Used
2000 0010 0000 0000 0000 Not Used
4000 0100 0000 0000 0000 Not Used
8000 1000 0000 0000 0000 Not Used

Action Description Display Comments


Fault Trace Display Third word in the event trace is EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
the Voltage reference for the
Analog to Digital Converter.
ADC CURRENT REF
0.000 V

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display Next is the Voltage measurement EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
of the Internal 24V power supply
for the Opto Inputs and Outputs.
24 V REF
0.0 V

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display Next is the status of the nine EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
Digital Input signals.
J2-8 (Enable) left most digit=1.
USER INPUTS
J2-16 (DIN#8) right most digit=0. 100000000 This is a bit display, not a hex
value.

STATUS T0003 BACK

MN740 Troubleshooting 5‐3


Trace Displays Continued

Action Description Display Comments


Fault Trace Display Next is the status of the Digital EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
Output signals.
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
00000000 This is a bit display, not a hex
value.

STATUS T0003 BACK

Digital Outputs Display


Description
Hexadecimal Binary
00 0000 0000 No Fault
01 0000 0001 Actual Speed is less than Zero Speed Band
02 0000 0010 Main SCR enable (active low)
04 0000 0100 Dynamic Brake active
08 0000 1000 Soft start (pre-charge) relay active
10 0001 0000 Relay Output 2 (J3-28, 29, 30) active
20 0010 0000 Relay Output 1 (J3-25, 26, 27) active
40 0100 0000 Digital Output 2 (J2-19,20) active
80 1000 0000 Digital Output 1 (J2-17,18) active

Action Description Display Comments


Fault Trace Display Next is the voltage present at EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
Analog Input 1.
ANA INPUT 1
0.0 V

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display Next is the voltage present at EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
Analog Input 2.
ANA INPUT 2
0.0 V

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display Next is the Speed Reference EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
Setting.
SPEED REF
0 RPM

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display Next is the AC output current on EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
phase 1.
PH1 CURRENT
0.0 A

STATUS T0003 BACK

5‐4 Troubleshooting MN740


Trace Displays Continued

Action Description Display Comments


Fault Trace Display Next is the AC output current on EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
phase 2.
PH2 CURRENT
0.0 A

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display Next is the AC output current on EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.
phase 3.
PH3 CURRENT
0.0 A

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display Next is the Motor Current. EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.

MOTOR CURRENT
0.0A

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display Next is the Motor Torque. EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.

MOTOR TORQUE
0.0 NM

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display Next is the Motor Voltage. EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.

MOTOR VOLTS
0.0V

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display Next is the Motor Speed. EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.

MOTOR SPEED
0 RPM

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display Next is Bus Voltage. EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.

BUS VOLTAGE
0.0 V

STATUS T0003 BACK

MN740 Troubleshooting 5‐5


Trace Displays Continued

Action Description Display Comments


Fault Trace Display The control heatsink temperature. EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.

DRIVE TEMP
0.0 °C

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display The fault code for the event. EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.

FAULT LATCH
0x0000

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display The alarm code for the event. EV. LOG FAULT TRACE Press  or  to view next entry.

ALARM LATCH
0x0000

STATUS T0003 BACK

Fault Trace Display EV. LOG


Press Enter or R to return to the
event log.
END OF
FAULT TRACE

STATUS BACK

Diagnostics Information
After power up, select the Diagnostic Menu to see information from the diagnostic displays.

Action Description Display Comments


Press Menu Displays top level menu options. Press  or  to move cursor over
STATUS the “DIAGNOSTICS” selection.
QUICK SETUP
PROGRAMMING
EVENT LOG Press Enter to view diagnostic
DIAGNOSTICS information.
DISPLAY OPTIONS
STATUS BACK

Press  to display next DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or


group. previous Diagnostic screen.
POWER BASE
DC Bus Voltage BUS VOLTAGE 333.9V Press R to return to previous
Drive Heatsink Temperature DRIVE TEMP 26.1C menu.
% Overload (remaining) OVERLOAD LE 100.0%
EV. LOG 0r MAIN

Press  to display next Displays active operating mode DIAG STOP LOCAL
group. settings.
OPERATING MODE
Keypad
Speed
V/F Control

EV. LOG 0r MAIN

5‐6 Troubleshooting MN740


Diagnostics Continued
Action Description Display Comments
Press  to display next Bit display of digital inputs, DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. outputs and the voltage present at previous Diagnostic screen.
the internal 24V supply terminals. DIGITAL I/O
Note: Enable input=1. INPUTS 100000000 Press R to return to previous
Out1=1. OUTPUTS 0001 menu.
USER 24V 24.9V
EV. LOG 0r MAIN

Press  to display next DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or


group. previous Diagnostic screen.
PROC CONTROL PID Press R to return to previous
Output Frequency, % Feedforward 0.00HZ 0.0FF menu.
% Setpoint, % Feedback 0.0SP 0.0FB Note: This screen does not appear if
Level 2 Process Control, Process type is
EV. LOG 0r MAIN set to None.

Diagnostic Display Displays software version, hp, DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
volts and Amp/Volt ratings. IHH-1.XX
previous Diagnostic screen.
RATED HP 3HP
RATED VOLTS 240.0V Press R to return to previous
RATED A/V 4.0A/V menu.

EV. LOG 0r MAIN

Press  to display next DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or


group. previous Diagnostic screen.
IHH-1.XX
RATED CURRE 9.6A Press R to return to previous
RATED PK CU 16.8A menu.

EV. LOG 0r MAIN

Press  to display next DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or


group. Displays: previous Diagnostic screen.
POWER BASE VERSION
Power Base ID number ID 0x000A2003 Press R to return to previous
EE Firmware version EE VER 0x00000001 menu.
FPGA firmware version FPGA VER 0x00000A02
EV. LOG 0r MAIN

Press  to display next Displays real time clock values DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. (date and time) and total run time REAL TIME CLOCK previous Diagnostic screen.
since installation. Jul 4, 2006
22:07:35 Press R to return to previous
Press ENTER to set date and RUN TIMER 474.1HR menu.
time.
EV. LOG 0r MAIN

Press  to display next Displays energy cost (based on DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. parameter # 2305 value). ENERGY
previous Diagnostic screen.
EST POWER 0.00KW
EST ENERGY 0.0KWH Press R to return to previous
EST COST 0.0$ menu.

EV. LOG 0r MAIN Press A to go to Status screen.

MN740 Troubleshooting 5‐7


Diagnostics Continued
Action Description Display Comments
Press  to display next Diagnostic Analog Input values DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. display. previous Diagnostic screen.
ANALOG INPUTS
ANA IN1 1.3v Press R to return to previous
ANA IN2 0.0v menu.

EV. LOG 0r MAIN

Press  to display next Diagnostic Analog Output values DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. display. previous Diagnostic screen.
ANALOG OUTPUTS
ANA OUT1 0.0V Press R to return to previous
ANA OUT2 0.0V menu.

EV. LOG 0r MAIN

Press  to display next DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or


group. previous Diagnostic screen.
POSITION COUNTER
Full revolutions and REVOLUTIONS 0 Press R to return to previous
encoder counts are displayed. COUNTS 0CNT menu.

EV. LOG 0r MAIN

Press  to display next Diagnostic installed Option Card DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. identification display. OPTION BOARDS
previous Diagnostic screen.
OPTION 1 ETHERNET
OPTION 2 NONE Press R to return to previous
FEEDBACK NONE menu.

EV. LOG 0r MAIN Press A to go to Status screen.


Press  to display next Displays keypad software version. DIAG STOP LOCAL Press  or  to go to the next or
group. KEYPAD VERSION
previous Diagnostic screen.
KEYPAD SOF 1.xx 3/0
Press R to return to previous
menu.

EV. LOG 0r MAIN Press A to go to Status screen.


Press  to display next Displays Composite Reference DIAG STOP LOCAL
group. values. COMPOSITE REF
COMPONENT A 0.00%
COMPONENT B 0.00%
REFERENCE 0.00%

EV. LOG 0r Alarm

5‐8 Troubleshooting MN740


Fault Messages
Table 5‐1 Fault Messages
Type Fault Message Display Description
No fault exists Control is operating properly, no faults recorded.
F Unknown system fault Reset the control. Restore parameter values to factory settings.
F Configuration Reset the control. Restore parameter values to factory settings.
F SPI timeout Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) failure between control board and power board. Check connections.
F Param checksum Reset the control. Restore parameter values to factory settings.
F New base ID Changing the Power Base, Control board, or new firmware will most often cause this error.
Reset the control. Restore parameter values to factory settings.
F Over current Motor current exceeded peak limit. Check: motor connections, motor load, increase accel/decel times.
F Desaturation Output current exceeds desat limit. Check: motor for short circuit, motor load, increase accel/decel times.
F Ground fault Ground Fault detected (output current leakage to ground).
Disconnect motor, check motor for insulation leakage to ground.
F Logic supply Logic power supply failure detected.
F Power Base Fault Usually occurs with other faults. Fault detected in power base, see FPGA in event log trace.
F Low Initial BUS Bus volt less than 200/400/500V on 230/460/575V units at power up. Check: line volt, resistors on R1/ R2.
F Current Sense Occurs on power up, motor current sensor(s) out of tolerance.
F User ref Internal reference power supply out of tolerance.
F User 24 V 24V at J1-23 and J1-24 out of spec. Check 24V, if below, remove wiring from terminal strip, re-check.
F Current reference Reference volt for current readings out of tolerance.
F Overload - 1 minute Peak output current exceeded the 1 minute rating value. Check motor and wires, Level 2 Pk CUR Limit value,
Accel time or reduce motor load. Change Level 2 Drive Protect, Overload to “Foldback” and try again.
F Overload - 3 seconds Peak output current exceeded the 3 second rating value. Check motor and wires, Level 2 Pk CUR Limit value,
Accel time or reduce motor load. Change Level 2 Drive Protect, Overload to “Foldback” and try again.
F Motor Overload Motor current exceeded preset limits: 125% for 590 sec., 150% for 150 sec. or 200% for 50 sec.
F Following Error Speed error beyond Set Speed Band parameter value. Verify motor is not overloaded.
F DC Bus High DC Bus V over 405/810/1000V for 230V/460V/575V units. Check line volt, decel rates, resistor on R1/ R2.
F DC Bus Low DC Bus V below 220/440/550V for 230V/460V/575V units. Check line volt, B+ to B- voltage.
F Drive Over TEMP Heatsink temp exceeded 85/95°C. Verify ambient does not exceed 45°C. Clean fans and heatsink.
F Drive Low TEMP Heatsink temp is less than allowed (-10°C).
F External trip Connection at J2-16 is open and P2201 is set to ON.
F Torque Proving Failed to measure current in one or more motor phases. Check motor connections or open motor contacts.
F Regen R or PWR Excessive resistor power dissipation. Check resistor ratings, extend decel times, or add larger braking kit.
F EEPROM fault (Powerbase EE, EE memory. Reset the control. Restore parameter values to factory settings.
Control EE, Flt Log Mem, NV memory)
F Internal Config Software boot error. Reset the control. Restore parameter values to factory settings.
F Dyn Brake Desat Dynamic braking current limit exceeded. Check for shorted braking resistor circuit.
A Line Loss All 3 input phases lost. Check input circuit breaker, fuses or input contacts.
A Phase Loss One input phase lost. Check input circuit breaker, fuses or input contacts.
F U Upper Fault Power transistor gate fault on T1.
F U Lower Fault Power transistor gate fault on T1.
F V Upper Fault Power transistor gate fault on T2.
F V Lower Fault Power transistor gate fault on T2.
F W upper fault Power transistor gate fault on T3.
F W lower fault Power transistor gate fault on T3.
F Ph 1 pulse Phase 1 (T1) curr limiting via pulse by pulse method; check motor: spiking loads, chattering contacts.
F Ph 2 pulse Phase 2 (T2) curr limiting via pulse by pulse method; check motor: spiking loads, chattering contacts.
F Ph 3 pulse Phase 3 (T3) curr limiting via pulse by pulse method; check motor: spiking loads, chattering contacts.
F Network Timeout Forced network fault. Possible reason: watchdog, timing, user control.
F Memory Option card problem, memory failure.
A Aux Filter Setup Filter Source should be set to Raw Speed when destination is set to Speed Loop.
F Power Base FPGA Power base communication loss or invalid FPGA version.
A Sel FB Source Encoder Source Not Selected/Feedback Board is absent. Choose the appropriate card for encoder feedback.
F = Fault, A = Alarm

MN740 Troubleshooting 5‐9


Table 5‐1 Fault Messages Continued
Type Fault Message Display Description
F Download Parameter download from keypad or network has failed. Verify parameter set compatibility.
F Parameter Parameters momentarily locked. Wait 30 seconds, try again
A Invalid FB Sel Feedback board not installed on this slot. Select an encoder feedback board as encoder source.
F ADC Calib Fault Internal ADC calibration voltages out of range.
F Encoder Loss Encoder detected but has poor or no signal. Check encoder wiring.
F Over Speed Rotor speed over 110% maximum speed limit.
F DC Bus Short For UL testing only. Call Baldor for service.
A Motor Overtemp Motor has overheated, check: cooling system or blocked air flow.
A Fan Loss Fan circuit is seeing low current or over current. Check fan circuit.
F DC PK Overvolt Bus peak voltage rating exceeded. Check: AC input lines; sizing of dynamic brake.
A Line Sag All 3 phase input lines have sagged below 70% of nominal. Check input line quality
F Brake Desat Dynamic brake de-saturation has occurred. Check dynamic brake circuit.
F Pre-charge Fault Dynamic Brake miswired, AC Input too low, Bus Capacitors shorted or Input Single Phasing
A Drive Disabled Motion command given with drive disabled. Check: drive enable input.
A Drive Enabled Drive enabled during parameter download. Drive must be disabled.
A PB Power Supply Power base logic power supply output is too low.
A AC Input High Correct the AC input line voltage high condition.
A Initial Pos The initial position reading from the absolute position feedback could not be read or is out of expected range.
A Invalid Res Sel The feedback source selected is not a resolver board
F Resolver Loss Resolver detected but has poor or no signal. Check resolver wiring
A PF Setup Pulse follower option board setup incorrect. Check Master PPR, receive, transmit ratio and input type.
A Option Not Found Option Board for the feature requested is not installed.
F Pos Cnt Overflow Position counter has has exceeded max or min range.
A Opt1 Protocol or Opt2 Protocol Invalid protocol selected for OPT communication card 1 or card 2.
A Excess Faults/Hr The allowed number of faults/hour has been exceeded.
F Motor Overload Motor overloaded. Check motor load. Verify motor rated amps parameter.
F PLC Mode Trip PLC Mode Trip. PLC action has generated this trip. Check PLC program logic.
F Macro Read Read macro from EE PROM failed.
F Macro Rec Length Macro end command was not found during macro execution.
F Macro CMD Inval Invalid macro command was found.
F Macro CMD Failed Execution of a macro command generated an error.
F = Fault, A = Alarm

5‐10 Troubleshooting MN740


Electrical Noise Considerations
All electronic devices are vulnerable to significant electronic interference signals (commonly called “Electrical
Noise”). At the lowest level, noise can cause intermittent operating errors or faults. From a circuit standpoint, 5
or 10 millivolts of noise may cause detrimental operation. For example, analog speed and torque inputs are often
scaled at 5 to 10VDC maximum with a typical resolution of one part in 1,000. Thus, noise of only 5 mV
represents a substantial error.
At the extreme level, significant noise can cause damage to the drive. Therefore, it is advisable to prevent noise
generation and to follow wiring practices that prevent noise generated by other devices from reaching sensitive
circuits. In a control, such circuits include inputs for speed, torque, control logic, and speed and position
feedback, plus outputs to some indicators and computers.
Relay and Contactor Coils
Among the most common sources of noise are the coils of contactors and relays. When these highly inductive
coil circuits are opened, transient conditions often generate spikes of several hundred volts in the control circuit.
These spikes can induce several volts of noise in an adjacent wire that runs parallel to a control‐circuit wire.
Figure 5‐1 illustrates noise suppression for AC and DC relay coils.
Figure 5‐1 AC and DC Coil Noise Suppression
RC snubber +

0.47 f
AC Coil DC Coil Diode
33 


Wires between Controls and Motors
Output leads from a typical 460VAC drive controller contain rapid voltage rises created by power semiconductors
switching 650V in less than a microsecond, 1,000 to 10,000 times a second. These noise signals can couple into
sensitive drive circuits. If shielded pair cable is used, the coupling is reduced by nearly 90%, compared to
unshielded cable. Even input AC power lines contain noise and can induce noise in adjacent wires. In some
cases, line reactors may be required.
To prevent induced transient noise in signal wires, all motor leads and AC power lines should be contained in
rigid metal conduit, or flexible conduit. Do not place line conductors and load conductors in same conduit. Use
one conduit for 3 phase input wires and another conduit for the motor leads. The conduits should be grounded to
form a shield to contain the electrical noise within the conduit path. Signal wires ‐ even ones in shielded cable
should never be placed in the conduit with motor power wires.
Special Drive Situations
For severe noise situations, it may be necessary to reduce transient voltages in the wires to the motor by adding
load reactors. Load reactors are installed between the control and motor.
Line and Load Reactors are typically 3% reactance and are designed for the frequencies encountered in PWM
drives. For maximum benefit, the reactors should be mounted in the drive enclosure with short leads between the
control and the reactors.
Control Enclosures
Motor controls mounted in a grounded enclosure should also be connected to earth ground with a separate conductor
to ensure best ground connection. Often grounding the control to the grounded metallic enclosure is not sufficient.
Usually painted surfaces and seals prevent solid metallic contact between the control and the panel enclosure.
Likewise, conduit should never be used as a ground conductor for motor power wires or signal conductors.
Special Motor Considerations
Motor frames must also be grounded. As with control enclosures, motors must be grounded directly to the control
and plant ground with as short a ground wire as possible. Capacitive coupling within the motor windings produces
transient voltages between the motor frame and ground. The severity of these voltages increases with the length of
the ground wire. Installations with the motor and control mounted on a common frame, and with heavy ground wires
less than 10 ft. long, rarely have a problem caused by these motor-generated transient voltages.
Analog Signal Wires
Analog signals generally originate from speed and torque controls, plus DC tachometers and process controllers.
Reliability is often improved by the following noise reduction techniques:
• Use twisted‐pair shielded wires with the shield grounded at the drive end only.
• Route analog signal wires away from power or control wires (all other wiring types).
• Cross power and control wires at right angles (90°) to minimize inductive noise coupling.

MN740 Troubleshooting 5‐11


5‐12 Troubleshooting MN740
Section 6
Specifications, Ratings & Dimensions

Specifications:
Voltage 120 240 240 480 600
Voltage range 95-130 180-264 180-264 340-528 515-660
Input Ratings Phase Single Phase Three Phase (single phase with derating)
Frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Impedance 1% minimum from mains connection

Horsepower 3/ ‐3 HP @ 120/240VAC, 1PH


4
3/ ‐60 HP @ 240VAC, 3PH
4
3/ ‐125 HP @ 480VAC, 3PH
4
3/ ‐125 HP @ 600VAC, 3PH
4
Output Ratings Overload Capacity Constant Torque = 150% for 60 seconds, 175% for 3 seconds
Variable Torque = 115% for 60 seconds
Frequency 0-500Hz
Voltage 0 to maximum input voltage (RMS)

Trip Missing control power, over current, over voltage, under voltage,
over temperature (motor or control), output shorted or grounded, motor overload
Stall Prevention Over voltage suppression, over current suppression
Protective Features External Output LED trip condition indicators, 4 assignable logic outputs, 2 assignable analog outputs
Short Circuit Phase to phase, phase to ground
Electronic Motor Overload Meets UL508C (I2T)

Temperature -10 to 45 °C Derate 3% per degree C above 45 to 55 °C maximum ambient temperature


Cooling Forced air
Enclosure NEMA 1
Altitude Sea level to 3300 Feet (1000 Meters)
Derate 2% per 1000 Feet (303 Meters) above 3300 Feet
Environmental
Conditions Humidity 10 to 90% RH Non‐Condensing
Shock 1G
Vibration 0.5G at 10Hz to 60Hz
Storage Temperature ‐10 to +65 °C
Duty Cycle 1.0

Display LCD Graphical 128x64 Pixel


Keys 14 key membrane with tactile response
Functions Output status monitoring
Digital speed control
Parameter setting and display
Diagnostic and Fault log display
Keypad Motor run and jog
Display Local/Remote toggle
LED Indicators Forward run command
Reverse run command
Stop command
Jog active
Remote Mount 200 feet (60.6m) maximum from control
Trip Separate message and trace log for each trip, last 10 trips retained in memory

MN740 Specifications, Ratings & Dimensions 6‐1


Specifications Continued

Control Method Microprocessor controlled PWM output, selectable encoderless vector or V/Hz inverter
PWM Frequency Adjustable 1.5-5kHz STD, 5-16 kHz quiet
Speed Setting ±5 VDC, 0-5 VDC ±10 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA; digital (keypad), Serial Comms/USB 2.0, and
Modbus RTU standard
Accel/Decel 0-3600 seconds
Motor Matching Automatic tuning to motor with manual override
PC Setup Software Workbench software available using USB2.0 port for commissioning wizard, firmware download, parameter
viewer, scope capture and cloning
Velocity Loop Bandwidth Adjustable to 180 Hz (Control only)
Current Loop Bandwidth Adjustable to 1200 Hz (Control only)
Maximum Output 500 Hz
Frequency
Quiet PWM Frequency Full rating 5‐8 kHz PWM frequency,
Version Adjustable to 16 kHz with linear derating (between 8 ‐ 16kHz) of 50% at 16 kHz (Size AA and B only)
Control Specifications 600VAC controls do not allow operation above 5kHz (Size C only)
Standard PWM Full rating 1.5‐2.5 kHz PWM frequency,
Frequency Version Adjustable to 5 kHz with linear derating (between 2.5 ‐ 5kHz) of 20% (240VAC) at 5 kHz
Adjustable to 5 kHz with linear derating (between 2.5 ‐ 5kHz) of 25% (480/600VAC) at 5 kHz
Selectable Operating Keypad
Modes Standard Run, 2 Wire
Standard Run, 3 Wire
15 Preset Speeds
Fan Pump 2 Wire
Fan Pump 3 Wire
Process Control
3 SPD ANA 2 Wire
3 SPD ANA 3 Wire
Electronic Pot 2 Wire
Electronic Pot 3 Wire
Network
Profile Run
Bipolar
PLC
Composite Reference

6‐2 Specifications, Ratings & Dimensions MN740


Specifications Continued

Common Mode 40 db
Rejection
Differential Full Scale Range ±5VDC, ±10VDC, 4‐20 mA and 0-20 mA
Analog Input
Resolution 11 bits + sign
Input Impedance 80 kOhms (Volt mode); 500 Ohms (Current mode)

Full Scale Range 0 ‐ 10 VDC


Single Ended Resolution 11 bits + sign
Analog Input
Input Impedance 80 kOhms

Analog Outputs 2 Assignable


Full Scale Range AOUT1 (0-5V, 0-10V, 0-20mA or 4-20mA), AOUT2 (±5V, ±10V)
Analog Outputs
Source Current 1 mA maximum (volt mode), 20mA (current mode)
Resolution 9 bits + sign

Opto‐isolated Inputs 8 Assignable, 1 dedicated input (Drive Enable)


Rated Voltage 10 ‐ 30 VDC (closed contacts std)
Digital Inputs Input Impedance 4.71 k Ohms
Leakage Current 10 A maximum
Update Rate 16 msec

Rated Voltage 5 to 30VDC


Maximum Current 60 mA Maximum
Digital Outputs ON Voltage Drop 2 VDC Maximum
(2 Opto Outputs)
OFF Leakage Current 0.1 A Maximum
Output Conditions 25 Conditions (see Output Setup Block parameter table, Table B‐1)

Rated Voltage 5 to 30VDC or 240VAC


Digital Outputs Maximum Current 5A Maximum non-inductive
(2 Relay Outputs)
Output Conditions 25 Conditions (see Output Setup Block parameter table, Table B‐1)

Diagnostic Indications:
Current Sense Fault Regeneration (db) Overload Following Error
Ground Fault Soft Start Fault PWR Base Fault
Instantaneous Over Current Under Voltage Logic Power Fault
Overload Ready
Line Power Loss Parameter Loss
Microprocessor Failure Overload
Over temperature (Motor or Control) Overvoltage
Over speed Torque Proving

Note: All specifications are subject to change without notice.

MN740 Specifications, Ratings & Dimensions 6‐3


Catalog Number Identification
V/Hz and Open Vector Control IHH 2 0 5 - E R

H2 V/Hz and Open Vector Control


Voltage Code
2= 240VAC, 3PH
4= 480VAC, 3PH
5= 600VAC, 3PH
6= 120/240VAC, 1PH Power Rating
05= 5 hp

Enclosure Type
E=NEMA1

Brake Information
None=Built-in Transistor and Resistor
R=Built-in Transistor

6‐4 Specifications, Ratings & Dimensions MN740


Ratings Series H2 Stock Products
Standard 2.5 kHz PWM
Catalog Input Constant Torque Variable Torque
No. Volt Size
Input Output Input Output
Amp HP KW IC IP Amp HP KW IC IP
IHH201-E, W 240 AA 4.2 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 6.8 2 1.5 6.8 7.8
IHH202-E, W 240 AA 6.8 2 1.5 6.8 11.9 9.6 3 2.2 9.6 11
IHH203-E, W 240 AA 9.6 3 2.2 9.6 16.8 15.2 5 3.7 15.2 17.5
IHH205-E, W 240 AA 15.2 5 3.7 15.2 26.6 22 7 1/2 5.6 22 25.3
IHH207-E, W 240 AA 22 7 1/2 5.6 22 38.5 22 7 1/2 5.6 22 32.2
IHH210-E 240 B 28 10 7.5 28 49 42 15 11 42 48.3
IHH215-E 240 B 42 15 11 42 74 42 20 15 54 62
IHH220-E 240 B 54 20 15 55 96 42 20 15 54 62
IHH225-E 240 C 68 25 18.7 68 119 80 30 22.4 80 92
IHH230-E 240 C 80 30 22.4 80 140 104 40 30 104 120
IHH240-E 240 C 104 40 29 104 182 104 40 30 104 120
IHH250-E 240 D 130 50 37 130 228 154 50 37 154 177
IHH260-E 240 D 154 60 44 154 270 192 60 44 192 221
IHH401-E, W 480 AA 2.1 1 0.75 2.1 3.7 3.7 2 1.5 3.4 3.9
IHH402-E, W 480 AA 3.4 2 1.5 3.4 6.0 4.8 3 2.2 4.8 5.5
IHH403-E, W 480 AA 4.8 3 2.2 4.8 8.4 7.6 5 3.7 7.6 8.8
IHH405-E, W 480 AA 7.6 5 3.7 7.6 13.3 11 7 1/2 5.6 11 12.7
IHH407-E, W 480 AA 11.0 7 1/2 5.6 11 19.3 14 10 7.5 14 16.1
IHH410-E, W 480 AA 14 10 7.5 14 24.5 14 10 7.5 14 16.1
IHH415-E 480 B 21 15 11 21 37 27 20 15 27 33.8
IHH420-E 480 B 27 20 15 27 47 34 25 18.5 34 42.5
IHH425-E 480 B 34 25 18.5 34 60 40 30 22 40 50
IHH430-E 480 C 40 30 22 40 70 52 40 30 52 60
IHH440-E 480 C 52 40 30 52 91 65 50 37 65 75
IHH450-E 480 C 65 50 37 65 114 77 60 45 77 89
IHH460-E 480 D 77 60 44 77 135 96 75 56 96 110
IHH475-E 480 D 96 75 56 96 168 124 100 75 124 143
IHH4100-E 480 D 124 100 75 124 217 156 125 93 156 179
IHH4125-E 480 D 156 125 93 156 273 180 150 112 180 207
IHH501-E, W 600 AA 1.7 1 0.75 1.7 3.0 2.7 2 1.5 2.7 3.1
IHH502-E, W 600 AA 2.7 2 1.5 2.7 4.7 3.9 3 2.2 3.9 4.5
IHH503-E, W 600 AA 3.9 3 2.2 3.9 6.8 6.1 5 3.7 6.1 7.0
IHH505-E, W 600 AA 6.1 5 3.7 6.1 10.7 9 7 1/2 5.6 9 10.4
IHH507-E, W 600 AA 9.0 7 1/2 5.6 9 15.8 11 10 7.5 11 12.7
IHH510-E, W 600 AA 11.3 10 7.5 11 19.3 11 10 7.5 11 12.7
IHH515-E 600 B 17.5 15 11 17 30 23 20 15 22 25.3
IHH520-E 600 B 23 20 15 22 39 28 25 18.5 27 31
IHH525-E 600 B 28 25 18 27 47 28 25 18.5 32 36.8
IHH530-E 600 C 33 30 22 32 56 42 40 30 41 51
IHH540-E 600 C 42 40 30 41 72 56 50 37 52 60
IHH550-E 600 C 56 50 37 52 91 67 60 45 62 71
IHH560-E 600 D 62 60 44 62 109 77 75 56 77 89
IHH575-E 600 D 77 75 56 77 135 99 100 75 99 114
IHH5100-E 600 D 99 100 75 99 173 125 125 93 125 144
IHH5125-E 600 D 125 125 93 125 219 144 150 112 144 166
120 AA 12 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 20 2 1.5 6.8 7.8
IHH601-E
240 AA 6.3 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 10.2 2 1.5 6.8 7.8
120 AA 20 2 1.5 6.8 11.9 30 3 2.2 9.6 11
IHH602-E
240 AA 10.2 2 1.5 6.8 11.9 14.4 3 2.2 9.6 11
120 AA 30 3 2.2 9.6 16.8 30 3 2.2 9.6 11
IHH603-E
240 AA 14.4 3 2.2 9.6 16.8 14.4 3 2.2 9.6 11

MN740 Specifications, Ratings & Dimensions 6‐5


Ratings Series H2 Stock Products Continued
Quiet 8.0 kHz PWM
Catalog Input Constant Torque Variable Torque
No. Volt Size
Input Output Input Output
Amp HP KW IC IP Amp HP KW IC IP
IHH201-E, W 240 AA 4.2 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 4.2 1 0.75 4.2 4.8
IHH202-E, W 240 AA 4.2 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 6.8 2 1.5 6.8 7.8
IHH203-E, W 240 AA 6.8 2 1.5 6.8 11.9 9.6 3 2.2 9.6 11.0
IHH205-E, W 240 AA 9.6 3 2.2 9.6 16.8 15.2 5 3.7 15.2 17.5
IHH207-E, W 240 AA 15.2 5 3.7 15.2 26.6 22 7 1/2 5.6 22 25.3
IHH210-E 240 B 22 7 1/2 5.6 22 39 28 10 7.5 28 32
IHH215-E 240 B 28 10 7.5 28 49 42 15 11 42 48
IHH220-E 240 B 42 15 11 42 74 56 20 15 54 62
IHH225-E 240 C 54 20 15 54 95 68 25 18.7 68 78
IHH230-E 240 C 78 25 18.7 68 119 80 30 22.4 80 92
IHH240-E 240 C 80 30 22.4 80 140 104 40 30 104 120
IHH250-E 240 D 130 40 29 104 182 130 50 37 130 167
IHH260-E 240 D 154 50 37 130 228 154 60 44 154 177
IHH401-E, W 480 AA 2.1 1 0.75 2.1 3.7 2.1 1 0.75 2.1 2.4
IHH402-E, W 480 AA 2.1 1 0.75 2.1 3.7 3.4 2 1.5 3.4 3.9
IHH403-E, W 480 AA 3.4 2 1.5 3.4 6.0 4.8 3 2.2 4.8 5.5
IHH405-E, W 480 AA 4.8 3 2.2 4.8 8.4 7.6 5 3.7 7.6 8.8
IHH407-E, W 480 AA 7.6 5 3.7 7.6 13.3 11 7 1/2 5.6 11 12.7
IHH410-E, W 480 AA 11.3 7 1/2 5.6 11 19.3 15 10 7.5 14 16.1
IHH415-E 480 B 14 10 7.5 14 24.5 21 15 11 21 24.2
IHH420-E 480 B 21 15 11 21 36.8 27 20 15 27 31
IHH425-E 480 B 27 20 15 27 47 34 25 18.5 34 39
IHH430-E 480 C 34 25 18.7 34 60 40 30 22 40 46
IHH440-E 480 C 40 30 22.4 40 70 52 40 30 52 60
IHH450-E 480 C
IHH460-E 480 D 65 50 37 65 114 77 60 44 77 89
IHH475-E 480 D 77 60 44 77 135 96 75 56 96 110
IHH4100-E 480 D 96 75 56 96 168 124 100 75 124 143
IHH4125-E 480 D 124 100 75 124 217 156 125 93 156 179
IHH501-E, W 600 AA 1.3 0.75 0.56 1.3 2.3 1.7 1 0.75 1.7 2.0
IHH502-E, W 600 AA 1.7 1 0.75 1.7 3.0 2.7 2 1.5 2.7 3.1
IHH503-E, W 600 AA 2.7 2 1.5 2.7 4.7 3.9 3 2.2 3.9 4.5
IHH505-E, W 600 AA 3.9 3 2.2 3.9 6.8 6.1 5 3.7 6.1 7.0
IHH507-E, W 600 AA 6.1 5 3.7 6.1 10.7 9 7 1/2 5.6 9 10.4
IHH510-E, W 600 AA 9.3 7 1/2 5.6 9 15.8 11.3 10 7.5 11 12.7
IHH515-E 600 B 11.3 10 7.5 11 19.3 18 15 11 17 19.6
IHH520-E 600 B 18 15 11 17 30 23 20 15 22 25
IHH525-E 600 B 23 20 15 22 39 28 25 18.5 27 31
IHH530-E 600 C
IHH540-E 600 C
IHH550-E 600 C
IHH560-E 600 D 52 50 37 52 91 62 60 44 62 71
IHH575-E 600 D 62 60 44 62 109 77 75 56 77 89
IHH5100-E 600 D 77 75 56 77 135 99 100 75 99 114
IHH5125-E 600 D 99 100 75 99 173 125 125 93 125 144
120 AA 7.4 0.75 0.56 3.2 5.6 12 1 0.75 4.2 4.8
IHH601-E
240 AA 4.8 0.75 0.56 3.2 5.6 6.3 1 0.75 4.2 4.8
120 AA 12 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 20 2 1.5 6.8 7.8
IHH602-E
240 AA 6.3 1 0.75 4.2 7.4 10.2 2 1.5 6.8 7.8
120 AA 20 2 1.5 6.8 11.9 30 3 2.2 9.6 11
IHH603-E
240 AA 10.2 2 1.5 6.8 11.9 14.4 3 2.2 9.6 11

6‐6 Specifications, Ratings & Dimensions MN740


Terminal Tightening Torque Specifications
Tightening Torque
240 VAC Power TB1 Ground Control J1, J2, J3 B+/R1; B+; B-; or R2 TH1 and TH2
Catalog No.
Lb‐in Nm Lb‐in Nm Lb‐in Nm Lb‐in Nm Lb‐in Nm
IHH201-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH202-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH203-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH205-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH207-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH210-E 35 4 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 35 4 4 0.45
IHH215-E 35 4 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 35 4 4 0.45
IHH220-E 35 4 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 35 4 4 0.45
IHH225-E 50 5.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 50 5.6 4 0.45
IHH230-E 50 5.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 50 5.6 4 0.45
IHH240-E 50 5.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 50 5.6 4 0.45
IHH250-E 120 13.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 100 11.3 4 0.45
IHH260-E 120 13.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 100 11.3 4 0.45
IHH401-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH402-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH403-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH405-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH407-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH410-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH415-E 35 4 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 35 4 4 0.45
IHH420-E 35 4 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 35 4 4 0.45
IHH425-E 35 4 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 35 4 4 0.45
IHH430-E 50 5.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 50 5.6 4 0.45
IHH440-E 50 5.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 50 5.6 4 0.45
IHH450-E 50 5.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 50 5.6 4 0.45
IHH460-E 80 9.1 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 80 9.1 4 0.45
IHH475-E 120 13.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 80 9.1 4 0.45
IHH4100-E 120 13.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 100 11.3 4 0.45
IHH4125-E 120 13.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 100 11.3 4 0.45
IHH501-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH502-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH503-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH505-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH507-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH510-E, W 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH515-E 35 4 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 35 4 4 0.45
IHH520-E 35 4 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 35 4 4 0.45
IHH525-E 35 4 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 35 4 4 0.45
IHH530-E 50 5.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 50 5.6 4 0.45
IHH540-E 50 5.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 50 5.6 4 0.45
IHH550-E 50 5.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 50 5.6 4 0.45
IHH560-E 80 9.1 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 80 9.1 4 0.45
IHH575-E 80 9.1 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 80 9.1 4 0.45
IHH5100-E 120 13.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 80 9.1 4 0.45
IHH5125-E 120 13.6 50 5.6 4.5 0.5 100 11.3 4 0.45
IHH601-E 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH602-E 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45
IHH603-E 8 0.9 15 1.7 4.5 0.5 8 0.9 4 0.45

MN740 Specifications, Ratings & Dimensions 6‐7


Mounting Dimensions
Size AA, B, C and D Controls
0.25 B C
(6.35)
dia

Exhaust
A

A1

Size # Holes Diameter inches (mm)


AA 4 0.6 (15)
B1
0.25
(6.35) dia Size AA OM2000A01

B C

0.35
(8.9)
Exhaust

A1 Size # Holes Diameter inches (mm)


3 0.6 (15)
B
3 1.25 (32)
3 0.6 (15)
C
3 1.68 (42)
3 0.6 (15)
D
3 1.68 (42)

0.35 (8.9)
B1 Size B, C and D OM2000A00
OM2000A02

Dimensions inches(mm)
Size Outside Mounting
Height (A) Width (B) Depth (C) Height (A1) Width (B1)
AA 12.27 (311) 7.97 (202) 8.21 (208) 11.75 (298) 7.38 (187)
B 18.00 (457) 9.10 (231) 9.75 (248) 17.25 (438) 7.00 (178)
C 22.00 (559) 9.10 (231) 9.75 (248) 21.25 (540) 7.00 (178)
D 28.00 (711) 11.50 (292) 13.00 (330) 27.25 (692) 9.50 (241)

6‐8 Specifications, Ratings & Dimensions MN740


Section 7
H2 PLC Mode Description

Overview PLC functionality is selected by setting Level 1, Input Setup block, Operating Mode parameter P#1401 to PLC.
PLC mode allows 2-Wire operating modes to be created using a selection of conditions, logical operators and
desired actions. PLC Mode parameters are located in Level 3, PLC block parameters P3401 through P3441.
3-W ire modes are not allowed.
Simply stated, for each logical statement choose two conditions from Table 7‐1, one logical operation from Table
7‐2 and one action from Table 7‐3. These 16 logical statements are evaluated every 10 milli seconds, in order
from P3401 to 3416. For each statement Condition 1 and Condition 2 are evaluated to True or False, the Logical
Operator is applied and the final outcome is either True or False.
If True the Action is taken; if False the Alternate Action is taken.
Conditions, operators and actions are pre-defined and so cannot be changed.
Configuration Parameters
The PLC program is contained within 16 statements, PLC CONFIG 1 (P3401) through PLC CONFIG 16 (P3416).
Each statement has the same 32 bit word format and structure as the example given in Figure 7‐1.
If P3401-P3216 are not programmed, the PLC Mode will do nothing. It is also possible to program them so that
the motor will not move. This can happen, for instance, if no Forward/Reverse Enables are programmed.
Figure 7‐1 Example PLC Configuration Parameters
Where:
Parameter Number Format = DDD.CCC.BBB.AAA DDD = bits 31-24 Byte 3
CCC = bits 23-16 Byte 2
BBB = bits 15-8 Byte 1
AAA = bits 7-0 Byte 0
Example: P3401 = 051.000.000.020
Parameter No. Hex Byte 3 Hex Byte 2 Hex Byte 1 Hex Byte 0 051 = Digital Input 1 (from Table 7‐1).
P3401 -3416 Condition ID Logical Operator ID Condition ID Action ID 000 = OR (from Table 7‐2).
MSD LSD 000 = False (from Table 7‐1).
(Table 7‐1) (Table 7‐2) (Table 7‐1) (Table 7‐3) 020 = Forward (from Table 7‐3).

A configuration parameter may be disabled (turned off) by setting bit 23 in its configuration word. This is the
same as setting the top most bit of byte 2 (the logical operator ID field). If any field within any of these
parameters is invalid, it is ignored at run time.
Only one runtime version exists at a time. The runtime version in effect is the one defined by the parameter table
active at the time the drive was placed in Remote Mode.
To switch runtime PLC versions perform the following operations:
1. Disable the drive.
2. At the keypad, select “Local” mode.
3. Select the desired parameter table.
4. Enable the drive.
5. At the keypad, select “Remote” mode.
If a parameter table is switched while the drive is enabled the runtime PLC version is not affected.
Comparator Parameters
Comparator parameters provide a way to monitor real-time signals within the drive and apply them to the PLC
Mode's logic. They may be used on the condition definition side of the PLC Mode's logic.
Parameters P3431 and P3433 hold parameter numbers (i.e. they point to other parameters, see Monitor and
RTC section in this manual for these values). P3432 and P3434 hold percents that are applied against P3431
and P3433 maximums, together they provide all that is needed for the following comparison equations:
If |Value of P3431| ≤ (P3432/100)*(Max of P3431) then True
or
If |Value of P3433| ≤ (P3434/100)*(Max of P3433) then True

In a sense P3431 and P3433 may be viewed as holding addresses for other parameters. For example:
If P3431 = 5 (selects parameter 5 which is Motor Volts = 230V) and P3432=20% then Comparator A is true if
|P5| = (20/100)*230 ≤ 46V. But if the voltage exceeds 46V, Comparator A is false.
If P3433 = 6 (selects parameter 6 Motor Current = 10 Amps) then Comparator B is true if |P6| ≤ 1 Amp.
Any parameter (see Monitor and RTC section in this manual for these values)can be used in a comparator.
Note: Don't use P3431 and P3433 since this would create a circular reference and the comparator would fail.

MN740 PLC Mode Description 7‐1


Table 7‐1 PLC Conditions
Dec Description Dec Description
0 False - This condition is always False 50 Digital Input 1 (J2-9) - If digital input 1 is high this condition is
true. (Level sensitive)
1 True - This condition is always True 51 Digital Input 2 (J2-10) - If digital input 2 is high this condition is
true. (Level sensitive)
2 Reserved (Workbench - Digital Input) 52 Digital Input 3 (J2-11) - If digital input 3 is high this condition is
true. (Level sensitive)
3 Reserved (Workbench - Hard Forward Limit) 53 Digital Input 4 (J2-12) - If digital input 4 is high this condition is
true. (Level sensitive)
4 Reserved (Workbench - Hard Reverse Limit) 54 Digital Input 5 (J2-13) - If digital input 5 is high this condition is
true. (Level sensitive)
5 Reserved (Workbench - Soft Forward Limit) 55 Digital Input 6 (J2-13) - If digital input 6 is high this condition is
true. (Level sensitive)
6 Reserved (Workbench - Soft Reverse Limit) 56 Digital Input 7 (J2-13) - If digital input 7 is high this condition is
true. (Level sensitive)
7 Reserved (Workbench - Move Statue) 57 Digital Input 8 (J2-13) - If digital input 8 is high this condition is
true. (Level sensitive)
8 Reserved (Workbench - Idle) 58 Drive Run - If the drive is on and has a forward or reverse
command this condition is True.
9 Reserved (Workbench - Position achieved) 59 Stop - If motion status is stopped this condition is True.
10 Reserved (Workbench - At target position) 60 Jog - If jog mode is active this condition is True.
11 Reserved (Workbench - In Idle Position Window) 61 Accelerating - If absolute speed demand is accelerating this
condition is True.
12 Reserved (Workbench - Following Error Fatal) 62 Constant Speed - If absolute speed demand is constant this
condition is True.
13 Reserved (Workbench - Following Error Warning) 63 Decelerating - If absolute speed demand is decelerating this
condition is True.
14 At Speed - If the measured speed of the rotor is within the At Speed 64 At Zero Speed - If absolute speed demand is below the Zero
Band (P1506) of the reference then this condition is True. Speed Set Point (P1505) this condition is True.
15 Reserved - (Workbench - Velocity Error) 65 At Set Speed - If absolute speed demand is above Set Speed
Point (P1507) this condition is True.
16 Velocity Setpoint Minimum - If the measured absolute speed is 66 Motor Over Current - If motor RMS current is above the
below the Minimum Output Speed (P2002) then this condition is Overload Set Point (P1508) this condition is True.
True.
17 Velocity Setpoint Maximum- If the measured absolute speed is 67 Motor Under Current - If motor RMS current is below the
above the Maximum Output Speed (P2003) then this is True. Underload Set Point (P1509) this condition is True.
18 Reserved 68 Keypad Control - If the drive is under keypad control this
condition is True.
19 Motor Overload - If the motor's I2T algorithm has exceeded its 69 Dynamic Brake - If the drive's dynamic brake is on this
integral limit this condition is True. condition is True.
20 Drive Overload - If the drive's I2T algorithm has exceeded its 70 Frequency Foldback - If the drive is in frequency foldback this
integral limit this condition is True. condition is True.

7‐2 PLC Mode Description MN740


Table 7‐1 PLC Conditions Continued
Dec Description Dec Description
21 Motor Direction - If rotor speed is positive this condition is True 71 Alarm - If an alarm is active this condition is True.
22 Command Direction - If speed demand is positive this condition 72 Forward - If the drive has a forward command this condition is
is True True.
23 Ready - If soft start is complete, drive hardware enable is on 73 Reverse - If the drive has a reverse command this condition is
and there are no errors this condition is True. True.
24 Drive On - If the drive is ready and producing PWM to the motor 74 Process PID Error - If the absolute value of Process PID Error is
this condition is True. less than the Process PID Error Tolerance (P2606) this
condition is True.
25 Fault - If the drive is faulted for any reason this condition is True. 75 Sleep Mode - If the drive's sleep algorithm has put the drive to
sleep this condition is True.
26 Motor Over Temp Trip - If the motor's over temperature trip 76 Comparator A - Monitors a parameter and returns True if the
input has occurred then this condition is True. parameter is less than a predefined setpoint.
NOTE: See section on PLC Comparator Parameters
27 Drive Over Temp Trip - If the drive's over temperature trip input 77 Comparator B - Monitors a parameter and returns True if the
has occurred then this condition is True. parameter is below a predefined setpoint.
NOTE: See section on PLC Comparator Parameters
28 Drive Over Temp Warning - If the drive's temperature has 78 Parameter Table 1 - If parameter table 1 is active then this
exceeded that defined for the drive then this condition is True. condition is True.
29 Reserved (Workbench - home status) 79 Parameter Table 2 - If parameter table 2 is active then this
condition is True.
80 Parameter Table 3 - If parameter table 3 is active then this
condition is True.
81 Parameter Table 4 - If parameter table 4 is active then this
condition is True.
82 Digital Output 1- If digital output 1 is On this condition is True.
83 Digital Output 2- If digital output 2 is On this condition is True.
84 Relay Output 1 - If relay output 1 is On this condition is True.
85 Relay Output 2 - If relay output 2 is On this condition is True.
86 Timer A - True if Timer A has expired.
87 Timer B - True if Timer B has expired.
88 Less Than (<) - Monitors two parameters (A & B) and returns
True if A<B else False is returned.
89 Equal (=) - Monitors two parameters (A & B) and returns True if
A=B else False is returned.
90 Greater Than (>) - Monitors two parameters (A & B) and returns
True if A>B else False is returned.
100 Logical Variable A - Logical variable A is tested for True/False
101 Logical Variable B - Logical variable B is tested for True/False
102 Logical Variable C - Logical variable C is tested for True/False
103 Logical Variable D - Logical variable D is tested for True/False
110 Place holder for next condition

Table 7‐2 PLC Logical Operators


Dec Description
0 OR
1 AND
2 XOR
3 NOR
4 NAND
5 Reserved

MN740 PLC Mode Description 7‐3


Table 7‐3 PLC Actions
Dec Description Dec Description
0 Digital Output 1 - If the input condition is True then Digital Output 20 Forward Enable/Disable - If the input condition is True forward
1 (J2-17,18) will be active otherwise it is inactive motion is enabled otherwise it is disabled.
NOTE: Digital output 1 must have been set to “PLC” using P1501
1 Digital Output 2 - If the input condition is True then Digital Output 21 Reverse Enable/Disable - If the input condition is True reverse
2 (J2-19,20) will be active otherwise it is inactive motion is enabled otherwise it is disabled.
NOTE: Digital output 2 must have been set to “PLC” using P1502
2 Relay Output 1 - If the input condition is True then Relay Output 22 Acc/Dec Group Select - If the input condition is True then Acc/Dec
1 (J3-25,26,27) will be active otherwise it is inactive group 2 is selected otherwise group 1 is selected.
NOTE: Relay output 1 must have been set to “PLC” using P1503 NOTE: If this action is not programmed Group 1 is active by default.
3 Reserved (Workbench - Fault) 23 Reset - If the input condition is True a reset request is issued.
NOTE: This action is edge triggered on a False ? True transition.
NOTE: Pre-existing faults/alarms may or may not be cleared.
4 Drive Enable/Disable - If the condition is True then the drive is 24 Preset Speed/Analog - If the input condition is True then the
capable of producing power. If the condition is False the drive is Preset Speed Select Table Index sets the speed reference from
disabled. NOTE: If not programmed, J2-8 alone enables the drive the Preset Speeds (P1001-P1015) else the Command Source
NOTE: The drive's hardware enable input (J2-8) must be is active (P1402) selects the speed reference.
for this action. NOTE: If this action is not programmed P1402 is always active.
NOTE: If the Preset Speed Select Table Index is not programmed
then P1001 is used.
5 Jog Reverse - If the condition is True then the motor will jog in the 25 Preset Speed Select Table Index Bit 0 - If the input condition is
reverse direction at the speed set by P1201 if jogging is enabled. True then bit 0 of the Preset Speed Select Table Index is set else
NOTE: If both jog forward and reverse are active the motor stops it is reset.
NOTE: If this action is not programmed then bit 0 is reset.
6 Jog Forward - If the condition is True then the motor will jog in the 26 Preset Speed Select Table Index Bit 1 - If the input condition is
forward direction at the speed set by P1201 if jogging is enabled. True then bit 1 of the Preset Speed Select Table Index is set else
NOTE: If both jog forward and reverse are active the motor stops it is reset.
NOTE: If this action is not programmed then bit 1 is reset.
7 Reserved (Workbench - Hold) 27 Preset Speed Select Table Index Bit 2 - If the input condition is
True then bit 2 of the Preset Speed Select Table Index is set else
it is reset.
NOTE: If this action is not programmed then bit 2 is reset.
8 Stop Enable/Disable - If the input condition is True the motor is 28 Preset Speed Select Table Index Bit 3 - If the input condition is
stopped. True then bit 3 of the Preset Speed Select Table Index is set else
it is reset.
NOTE: If this action is not programmed then bit 3 is reset.
9 Reserved (Workbench - Error Deceleration) 29 Process PID Enable/Disable - If the input condition is True then
the Process PID is active otherwise it is inactive.
NOTE: The Process PID is automatically set to inactive during
keypad control or while jogging.
10 Reserved (Workbench - Cancel) 30 Keypad - If the input condition is True then forward/reverse and
stop commands along with the keypad's local speed reference
control the drive. The keypad is disabled by default.
11 Reserved (Workbench - Disable) 31 Electronic Pot - If the input condition is True the Electronic Pot sets
the speed reference otherwise it is not active. The pot is disabled
by default.
12 Reserved (Workbench - Forced Abort) 32 Decrease Electronic Pot Speed Reference- If the input condition
is True the Electronic Pot speed reference is increased else has
no affect.. NOTE: E-Pot is non-volatile
NOTE: E-Pot is unipolar so direction is determined by
forward/reverse commands.
13 Reserved (Workbench - Fast Gear) 33 Increase Electronic Pot Speed Reference- If the input condition is
True the Electronic Pot speed reference is decreased else has no
affect.. NOTE: E-Pot is non-volatile
NOTE: E-Pot is unipolar so direction is determined by
forward/reverse commands.
18 Jog Enable - Allows jogging if True else jogging is disabled 34 Parameter Table Select Enable - If the input condition is True
enables parameter table selection through the parameter table
select index, else parameter table selection is disabled.
19 Fault - If the input condition is True a “PLC Fault” is triggered 35 Parameter Table Select Index Bit 0 - If the input condition is True
then bit 0 of the Parameter Table Select Index is set else it is reset.
NOTE: If this action is not programmed then bit 0 is reset
NOTE: This index sets the active parameter table

7‐4 PLC Mode Description MN740


Table 7‐3 PLC Actions Continued
Dec Description Dec Description
36 Parameter Table Select Index Bit 1 - If the input condition is True 43 Logical Variable D - If the input condition is True then logical
then bit 1 of the Parameter Table Select Index is set else it is reset. variable D is set else reset
NOTE: If this action is not programmed then bit 1 is reset
NOTE: This index sets the active parameter table
37 Relay Output 2 - If the input condition is True then Relay Output 50 Start Timer A - If the input condition is True zero Timer A else do
2 (J3-28,29,30) will be active otherwise it is inactive nothing.
NOTE: Relay Output 2 must have been set to “PLC” using P1504
38 Torque/Speed Mode - If the input condition is True then the drive 51 Stop Timer A - If the input condition is True, set Timer A= P3440
controls torque else it controls speed. Default is speed control. counts else do nothing
NOTE: For V/F, torque control is not supported and is ignored.
40 Logical Variable A - If the input condition is True then logical 52 Start Timer B - If the input condition is True, set Timer B= 0
variable A is set else reset else do nothing
41 Logical Variable B - If the input condition is True then logical 53 Stop Timer B - If the input condition is True, set Timer B= P3441
variable B is set else reset counts else do nothing.
42 Logical Variable C - If the input condition is True then logical
variable C is set else reset

Table 7‐4 Preset Speed Select Index


PLC Actions
Description
Binary
Dec
28 27 26 25 Description
0 0 0 0 0 Preset Speed 1 (P1001)
1 0 0 0 1 Preset Speed 2 (P1002)
2 0 0 1 0 Preset Speed 3 (P1003)
3 0 0 1 1 Preset Speed 4 (P1004)
4 0 1 0 0 Preset Speed 5 (P1005)
5 0 1 0 1 Preset Speed 6 (P1006)
6 0 1 1 0 Preset Speed 7 (P1007)
7 0 1 1 1 Preset Speed 8 (P1008)
8 1 0 0 0 Preset Speed 9 (P1009)
9 1 0 0 1 Preset Speed 10 (P1010)
10 1 0 1 0 Preset Speed 11 (P1011)
11 1 0 1 1 Preset Speed 12 (P1012)
12 1 1 0 0 Preset Speed 13 (P1013)
13 1 1 0 1 Preset Speed 14 (P1014)
14 1 1 1 0 Preset Speed 15 (P1015)
15 1 1 1 1 Zero Speed (Not Defined)

Table 7‐5 Parameter Table Select Index


PLC Actions
Description
Binary
Dec
36 35 Description
0 0 0 Parameter Table 1 (P52 set to T1)
1 0 1 Parameter Table 2 (P52 set to T2)
2 1 0 Parameter Table 3 (P52 set to T3)
3 1 1 Parameter Table 4 (P52 set to T4)

MN740 PLC Mode Description 7‐5


PLC Programming Examples
PLC Mode as Standard Run Two Wire
This example shows how the PLC Mode may operate as the Standard Run Two Wire Mode.
These parameter values are entered from the keypad.
Initialization:
Parameter Value Comment
P1401 PLC PLC operating mode selected

PLC Mode configuration parameters:


Parameter Parameter Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 0
Number Dec Value Condition Logic Condition Action
P3401 050.000.000.020 Input 1 (50) OR (0) False (0) Forward (20)
P3402 051.000.000.021 Input 2 (51) OR (0) False (0) Reverse (21)
P3403 052.000.053.018 Input 3 (52) OR (0) Input 4 (53) Jog Enable (18)
P3404 052.000.000.006 Input 3 (52) OR (0) False (0) Jog Forward (6)
P3405 053.000.000.005 Input 4 (53) OR (0) False (0) Jog Reverse (5)
P3406 054.000.000.022 Input 5 (54) OR (0) False (0) Acc/Dec Group (22)
P3407 055.000.000.024 Input 6 (55) OR (0) False (0) Presets/Analog (24)
P3408 056.000.000.023 Input 7 (56) OR (0) False (0) Reset (23)
P3409 057.003.000.019 Input 8 (57) NOR (3) False (0) Fault (19)

J1 J2
10K Pot or 1 User Analog Return * Enable 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward 9 Digital Input 1
0‐10VDC
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Jog Forward 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Jog Reverse 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Accel/Decel Select 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Preset Speed #1 14 Digital Input 6
Fault Reset 15 Digital Input 7
Fault 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
See recommended tightening torques in connection information.
Section 6. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

The Parameter Dec Value column can be used when entering the PLC configuration parameters at the keypad
(parameters are shown as decimal long values - byte3.byte2.byte1.byte0).
For this mode Enable is active.
Note that Preset Speed 1 is active so the Preset Speed Select Table Index need not be programmed since it
automatically follows action 24 (Presets/Analog).
Jog is enabled anytime input 3 or 4 is on while these same inputs set the direction for jog.
The Fault action is programmed to trigger whenever digital input 8 goes low.

7‐6 PLC Mode Description MN740


PLC Programming Examples Continued
PLC Mode as 15 Preset Speed Mode
This example shows how the PLC Mode creates the 15 Preset Speed Mode.
Initialization:
Parameter Value Comment
P1401 PLC PLC operating mode selected
PLC Mode configuration parameters:
Parameter Parameter Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 0
Number Dec Value Condition Logic Condition Action
P3401 050.000.000.020 Input 1 (50) OR (0) False (0) Forward (20)
P3402 051.000.000.024 Input 2 (51) OR (0) False (0) Reverse (21)
P3403 001.000.000.035 True (1) OR (0) False (0) Presets/Analog (24)
P3404 052.000.000.025 Input 3 (52) OR (0) False (0) Preset Tbl Bit 0 (25)
P3405 053.000.000.026 Input 4 (53) OR (0) False (0) Preset Tbl Bit 1 (26)
P3406 054.000.000.027 Input 5 (54) OR (0) False (0) Preset Tbl Bit 2 (27)
P3407 055.000.000.028 Input 6 (55) OR (0) False (0) Preset Tbl Bit 3(28)
P3408 052.001.053.040 Input 3 (52) AND (1) Input 4 (53) Variable A (40)
P3409 054.001.055.041 Input 5 (54) AND (1) Input 6 (55) Variable B (41)
P3410 100.001.101.023 A (100) AND (1) B (101) Reset (23)
P3411 056.000.000.022 Input 7 (56) OR (0) False (0) Acc/Dec Group (22)
P3412 057.003.000.019 Input 8 (57) NOR (3) False (0) Fault (19)

J1 J2
* Enable
1 User Analog Return 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Run 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Run 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Switch 1 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Switch 2 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Switch 3 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Switch 4 14 Digital Input 6
Accel/Decel 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See recommended tightening torques in See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
Section 6. connection information. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

The Parameter Dec Value column can be used when entering the PLC configuration parameters at the keypad
(parameters are shown as decimal long values - byte3.byte2.byte1.byte0).
For this mode Enable is active.
The unconditional True statement in P3403 always enables the preset speed table, Table 7‐4.
Logical variables A and B are used to perform a compound logical “AND” with four inputs to generate a reset
command. Note that the order of execution of the statement is important.
The Fault action is programmed to trigger whenever digital input 8 goes low.

MN740 PLC Mode Description 7‐7


PLC Programming Examples Continued
PLC Mode as Process PID Mode
This example shows the PLC Mode rendered as the Process PID Mode.
Initialization:
Parameter Value Comment
P1401 PLC PLC operating mode selected

PLC Mode configuration parameters:


Parameter Parameter Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 0
Number Dec Value Condition Logic Condition Action
P3401 050.000.000.020 Input 1 (50) OR (0) False (0) Forward (20)
P3402 051.000.000.021 Input 2 (51) OR (0) False (0) Reverse (21)
P3403 001.000.000.034 True (1) OR (0) False (0) Param Table Select (34)
P3404 052.000.000.035 Input 3 (52) OR (0) False (0) Table Select Bit 0 (35)
P3405 053.000.000.038 Input 4 (53) OR (0) False (0) Torque/Speed (38)
P3406 054.000.000.029 Input 5 (54) OR (0) False (0) PID (29)
P3407 055.000.000.018 Input 6 (55) OR (0) False (0) Jog Enable (18)
P3408 055.000.000.006 Input 6 (55) OR (0) False (0) Jog Forward (6)
P3409 056.000.000.023 Input 7 (56) OR (0) False (0) Reset (23)
P3410 057.003.000.019 Input 8 (57) NOR (3) False (0) Fault (19)

J1 J2
* Enable
1 User Analog Return 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Enable 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Enable 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ Table Select 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Speed/Torque 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Process Mode Enable 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Jog 14 Digital Input 6
Fault Reset 15 Digital Input 7
External Trip 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See recommended tightening torques in See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
Section 6. connection information. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

The Parameter Dec Value column can be used when entering the PLC configuration parameters at the keypad
(parameters are shown as decimal long values - byte3.byte2.byte1.byte0).
For this mode Enable is active.
The unconditional True statement P3403 enables parameter table select (Table 7‐5) at all times.
The Fault action is programmed to trigger whenever digital input 8 goes low.

7‐8 PLC Mode Description MN740


PLC Programming Examples Continued
PLC Mode as a Modified Process PID Mode
This example shows the PLC Mode as a modified Process PID Mode.
Initialization:
Parameter Value Comment
P1401 PLC PLC operating mode selected
P1501 PLC Digital Output 1 Set by PLC Mode Logic
P3431 10 Comparator A monitors absolute speed demand (P10)
P3432 20% Comparator A's constant (12 Hz for 60 Hz max)
P3440 3.00 sec Timer A set for 3 seconds

PLC Mode configuration parameters:


Parameter Parameter Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 0
Number Dec Value Condition Logic Condition Action
P3401 076.000.000.040 Comp A (76) OR (0) False (0) A (40)
P3402 050.000.000.020 Input 1 (50) OR (0) False (0) Forward (20)
P3403 051.000.000.021 Input 2 (51) OR (0) False (0) Reverse (21)
P3404 100.000.000.038 A (100) OR (0) False (0) Torque/Speed (38)
P3405 053.002.100.029 Input 4 (53) XOR (2) A (100) PID (29)
P3406 054.000.055.018 Input 5 (54) OR (0) Input 6 (55) Jog Enable (18)
P3407 054.000.000.006 Input 5 (54) OR (0) False (0) Jog Forward (6)
P3408 055.000.000.005 Input 6 (55) OR (0) False (0) Jog Reverse (5)
P3409 056.000.000.023 Input 7 (56) OR (0) False (0) Reset (23)
P3410 057.000.000.050 Input 8 (57) OR (0) False (0) Start Timer (50)
P3411 086.000.000.019 Timer A (86) OR (0) False (0) Fault (19)

J1 J2
* Enable
1 User Analog Return 8 Enable
2 Analog Input 1 Forward Enable 9 Digital Input 1
3 Analog Ref. Power + Reverse Enable 10 Digital Input 2
4 Analog Input 2+ PID 11 Digital Input 3
5 Analog Input 2- Jog Enable 12 Digital Input 4
6 Analog Output 1 Jog Forward 13 Digital Input 5
7 Analog Output 2 Jog Reverse 14 Digital Input 6
Fault Reset 15 Digital Input 7
Fault 16 Digital Input 8
*Note: Remove factory jumper from J2-8 and J3-24 before connecting switch at J2-8. 17 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
18 Digital Output 1 - (Emitter)
See recommended tightening torques in See Figure 3‐17 for 19 Digital Output 1 + (Collector)
Section 6. connection information. 20 Digital Output 2 - (Emitter)

The Parameter Dec Value column can be used when entering the PLC configuration parameters at the keypad
(parameters are shown as decimal long values - byte3.byte2.byte1.byte0).
For this mode Enable is active.
Use of logical variables A, B, C or D allows for complex PLC logic.
Variable “A” is set based on the outcome of a comparator and then used as an input condition
for the torque/speed select and PID actions.
Note that P3401 is programmed to set logical variable “A” before it is used since statements are
executed in order from P3401 through P3410.
Either input 5 or 6 enable jog and they also set jog direction as in P3407 and P3408.
Speed mode is active above 12 Hz but torque mode is active when less than 12Hz.
The PID becomes active above 12 Hz if input 4 is ON.
The PID becomes active at less than 12 Hz when input 4 is OFF.
The Fault action is programmed to trigger after a three second delay following digital input 8 going low.
Timer A is used to implement this action.
Normally P3410 continuously resets Timer A when digital input 8 is high.
If digital input 8 goes low then high in less than three seconds no fault action occurs since Timer A is reset
before it has a chance to timeout.
If digital input 8 goes low and stays low for at least 3 seconds then Timer A does timeout and a fault occurs.

MN740 PLC Mode Description 7‐9


7‐10 PLC Mode Description MN740
Section 8
H2 Composite Reference Description

Overview This reference is mathematically computed from any two valid drive parameters. Once configured, it can provide
a signal to drive the speed loop, torque loop or process PID. In addition, this reference can drive all existing
operating modes including the PLC Mode. Composite Ref can be referenced to any valid input:
P1402 - Command Source P2310 - Auxiliary Filter Source
P1415 - Current Limit Source P2603 - Process PID Feedback Source
P1418 - Torque Feedforward Source P2604 - Process PID Setpoint Source
Mathematical operations are performed at each stage in its development providing the ability to sum, difference,
multiply or divide any two parameters to form a complex internal reference source. This reference source can
influence the operation of all existing operating modes including PLC Mode.
The Composite Reference Parameter Block is programmed in the Level 3, Composite REF parameters.
Figure 8‐1 Composite Reference Generator Block Diagram
Stage 1 (P#3501 & 3507) Stage 2 (P#3502)
Scale Factor Math Function
Variable A Px Py Py Pz
Px
P y + P z + F(Py)
MaxPx
Stage 3 (P#3505) Stage 4 (P#3506)
Pz Binary Operator
Output is = ± 100% Math Function with Ry
Rx Rx Limit Setting Ry
Stage 1 (P#3503 & 3508) Stage 2 (P#3504) Pc
Scale Factor Math Function R x + (Pc)O(Pz) R y + F(R x)
Variable B Pa Pb Pb Pc
Pa
P b + P c + F(Pb)
MaxP a
Output is = ± 100%

Table 8‐1 Math Functions


ID Function Description Notes
0 0 Zero1 1. Zero Function, F(x) = 0
1 X Identity2 2. Identity Function, F(x) = x
3. Where, |x| is the absolute value function:
2 |X| Absolute Value |x|= x for x = 0
3 1/X Inversion |x|=-x for x < 0
4. The ramp generator is computed as follows:
4 X2 Square 0.0→1.0 for x > 0
Ǹ|A| Constant output for x = 0
5 Square Root3
0.0→-1.0 for x < 0
6 Sin(x) Sine With time period equal to 1.0/(|x|100) Sec
7 Cos(x) Cosine 5. The frequency generator is computed as follows:
y = Ramp(x)
8 Ramp(x) Ramp Generator4 Freq(x) = Sin(2πy)
9 Freq(x) Frequency Generator5 With output frequency equal to |x|100 Hz

Table 8‐2 Binary Operator Selection Parameter


ID Function Description Notes
0 + Sum 1. Y = Max(x, y) provides the maximum
1 - Difference 2. Y = Min(x, y) provides the minimum
2  Multiply
3 / Divide
4 Max Maximum1
5 Min Minimum2

MN740 Composite Reference Desciption 8‐1


Table 8‐3 Composite Reference Parameters
Stage # P# Description
1 3501 & 3503 Scale Factor - Monitor a parameter number (Variable A or B) and scales the value into percentage of maximum value for use by the
next stage. As an example, P3501=5 Motor Voltage (assume its maximum is 230V) is monitored and internally 20% is computed for
P5= 46 V or 10% for P5=23 V. Likewise, with P3503=11 then Speed Demand (assume its maximum is 60 Hz) is monitored and 50%
is output when P11=30 Hz or –50% when P11= -30 Hz.
If P3501 or P3503 can be can be set to any valid drive parameter number. If either is set to an invalid parameter number Py=0% or Pb=0%.
P3501 or P3503 only point to a valid parameter number in the active parameter table, never a parameter outside the active table.
Switching parameter tables with the drive enabled causes the Composite Reference to be redefined by the parameter values in the new
active parameter table.
2&4 3502, 3504 Math Function - These parameters select the mathematical functions to be applied at the second and fourth stage of the Composite
& 3506 Reference's derivation. Refer to Table 8‐1.
3 3505 Optional Operator - This parameter provides the mathematical operation to be performed at the third stage of the Composite Reference
derivation. Refer to Table 8‐2.
1 3507 & 3508 These parameters provide a way to scale up or down the percentage calculation of the first stage. They range from 0.001 to 1000.00
with default 1.00. Normally, the defaults work so these parameters need not be change.
A simple example of their use is: A 5A motor is connected to a 15A (peak) drive. When the motor is at rated amps only 5/15 or 33.3% is
passed on to stage 2, but by setting P3507=3.00, 100% is passed on allowing full use of the motor's current.

Composite Reference Examples


The following table gives examples of the kinds of Composite References that may be developed.
Table 8‐4 Examples
Composite Reference Parameters
P3501 P3502 P3503 P3504 P3505 P3506 P3507 P3508 Description
P103 Identity P104 Identity Sum Identity 0.5 0.5 Average of Analog Inputs 1&2:
Ry = (A1+A2)/2
P103 Identity P104 Freq Multiply Identity 1.0 1.0 Signal Generator with Magnitude set
by A1 and Frequency by A2:
Ry = A1 ⋅Freq(A2)
P103 Identity P104 Identity Divide Identity 1.0 1.0 Ratio of Analog Inputs 1&2:
Ry = A1/A2
P102 Square P104 Square Difference Square Root 1.0 1.0 Square Root of Difference of Squares
of Process Error and Analog2:

R y + ǸŤ P e
2
 * A 2
2
Ť

8‐2 Composite Reference Desciption MN740


Section 9
Monitor and RTC

Monitor Parameters (P0001 to P0202)


Monitor parameters can be viewed using the Workbench software. Most are read only (P0001) but some
(P0052) can be written as well.
Table 9‐1 Monitor Parameter Descriptions
P# R/W Name Unit Help
1 SOFTWARE VERSION Software Version. - Drive firmware version number
2 LOC/REM STATUS Local/Remote Status. - Source of run/stop commands. Local for keypad or Remove for terminal block
3 DRIVE STATUS Drive Enable Status. - 0 for disabled, 1 for enabled
4 MOTION STATUS Motion Status. - Status: stopped, forward, reverse, bipolar, sleep, homing, etc.
5 MOTOR VOLTS V Motor Volts. - Estimated line-to-line drive output RMS voltage
6 MOTOR CURRENT A Motor Current. - Measured motor RMS current
7 MOTOR ABS SPEED RPM Motor Absolute Speed. - Estimated or measured absolute rotor speed
8 POSITION COUNTER CNT Position Counter. - Accumulated count in revolutions and counts. Units: encoder counts
9 SPEED REF Hz Speed Reference. - Setpoint speed for motor. Command source parameter determines the source
10 ABS SPEED DEMAND Hz Absolute Speed Demand. - Absolute speed output from Speed Profiler.
11 SPEED DEMAND Hz Speed Demand. - Signed speed output from Speed Profiler
12 ABS MOTOR FREQ Hz Absolute Motor Frequency. - Estimated motor electrical frequency
13 MOTOR FREQ Hz Motor Frequency. - Signed motor frequency
14 DRIVE TEMP °C Drive Temperature. - Measured temperature of drive heat sink
15 BUS VOLTAGE V Bus Voltage. - Measured bus voltage. DC bus high fault occurs above 400/820V DC
16 OVERLOAD LEFT % Overload Remaining. - Current overload count remaining until overload fault/foldback occurs
17 INPUTS Digital Inputs. - State of terminal block digital inputs. Off/On indicated by 0/1
18 OUTPUTS Digital Outputs. - State of the terminal block digital/relay outputs. Off/On indicated by 0/1
19 R/W RATED HP HP Rated Horsepower. - Drive rated horsepower
20 R/W RATED CURRENT A Rated Current. - Nominal/derated drive continuous RMS current rating
21 R/W RATED PK CURRENT A Rated Peak Current. - Nominal/de-rated drive peak, short term, current rating
22 R/W RATED VOLTS V Rated Voltage. - Nominal voltage rating of drive
23 ACTIVE FAULTS Active Faults. - Number of active / simultaneous drive faults
24 ACTIVE FLT CODE Active Fault Code. - Currently active drive fault code number
25 PROC FEEDFORWARD % FF Process Feedforward. - Process PID feed forward signal
26 PROC SETPOINT % SP Process Setpoint. - Process PID set point signal
27 PROC FEEDBACK % FB Process Feedback. - Process PID feedback signal
28 ADC USER REF V ADC User Reference. - Hardware ADC reference voltage for analog inputs
29 ADC CURR REF V ADC Current Reference. - Hardware ADC reference voltage for currents
30 USER 24V V User 24V. - Measured, internally supplied 24V for I/O
31 MOTOR TORQUE NM Motor Torque. - Estimated motor torque from measured currents and motor model
32 AUTO-TUNE PROG % Auto-T une Progress. - Estimated progress of auto-tune test
33 LINE VOLTAGE V Line Voltage. - Estimated drive input line-to-line RMS voltage
34 RATED A/V A/V Rated Amps/Volt. - Nominal drive current scaling set at the factory
35 MOTOR POLES Motor Poles. - Calculated /entered number of motor poles
36 RUN TIMER HR Run Timer. - Accumulated drive run (non-idle) time in hours
37 ACTIVE ALARMS Active Alarms. - Number of currently active /simultaneous alarms
38 ACT ALARM CODE Active Alarm Code. - Currently active alarm code
39 ANA IN1 V Analog Input 1. - Measured value of analog input #1 on terminal input J1-2 and J1-1
40 ANA IN2 V Analog Input 2. - Measured value of analog input #2 on terminal input J1-4 and J1-5
41 ANA OUT1 V Analog Output 1. - Estimated value of analog output #1 on terminal J1-6
42 ANA OUT2 V Analog Output 2. - Estimated value of analog output #2 on terminal J1-7
43 OPTION1 Option 1. - Option board detected in option slot #1 (left slot)
44 OPTION2 Option 2. - Option board detected in option slot #2 (right slot)
45 FEEDBACK Feedback. - Feedback board detected in motor feedback board slot
46 DATE AND TIME Current Date and Time. - Real time clock current reading
47 DST STATUS DST Status. - Daylight Saving Time status: 0=Not Active 1=Active
48 RESERVED 48 Reserved parameter 48. - Not used
49 RESERVED 49 Reserved parameter 49. - Not used
50 RESERVED 50 Reserved parameter 50. - Not used
51 RESERVED 51 Reserved parameter 51. - Not used
52 R/W ACTIVE PARAM TBL Active Parameter Table. - Parameter table currently in use on the drive
53 EE VER Power Base EEPROM Rev. - Power base EEPROM parameter revision number. Set by factory
54 FPGA VER Power Base FPGA Rev. - Power base FPGA revision control number. Set by factory
55 ACC/DEC DEMAND Hz/SEC Accel/Decel Demand. - Current ramp rate used by the velocity profiler
56 ID CURRENT A ID Current. - D axis measured current proportional to motor flux
57 ID DEMAND A ID Demand. - D axis demand current proportional to motor flux
58 IQ CURRENT A IQ Current. - Q axis measured current proportional to motor torque
59 IQ DEMAND A IQ Demand. - Q demand current proportional to motor torque

MN740 Monitor and RTC Desciption 9‐1


Table 9‐1 Monitor Parameter Descriptions Continued
P# P# Name Unit Help
60 POWER FACTOR Power Factor. - Ratio of (real power)/(apparent power)
61 PHASE 1 CURRENT A Phase 1(U) Current. - Phase U current
62 PHASE 2 CURRENT A Phase 2(V) Current. - Phase V current
63 PHASE 3 CURRENT A Phase 3(W) Current. - Phase W current
64 VD DEMAND V VD Demand. - D axis voltage demand for setting up motor flux
65 VQ DEMAND V VQ Demand. - Q axis voltage demand for setting up motor torque
66 ELECTRICAL ANGLE ° Electrical Angle. - Electrical angle used to develop phased voltages to the motor
67 MOTOR SPEED RPM Motor Speed. - Current speed of the motor
68 AT TEST DESC Autotune Test Description. - Description of current autotuning state
69 R/W APP LAYER ERROR Application Layer Error. Application layer error code number. The last error that occurred
70 USB TRANSACTIONS USB Transactions. Total number of USB transactions since start up
71 USB ERRORS USB Errors. Total number of USB errors since start up
72 TSK STATUS Task Status. Runtime task overrun status. Bits correspond to tasks that have overrun their time limit
73 TSK ID Task ID. First task that overran its time slot
74 TSK COUNT Task Count. Total number of overruns for the first task to overrun its time slot
75 Kp PACKETS Keypad Packets. Total number of processed keypad packets
76 Kp T-GAPS Keypad Gaps. Total number of keypad inter-packet time gap errors
77 Kp NAKs Keypad NAKs. Total number of NAKs sent. High word are received NAKs low word is transmitted NAKs
78 EST POWER kW Estimated Power. - Drive power output estimated from measured current and voltages. Units: KW
79 EST ENERGY KWH Estimated Energy. - Delivered by drive. Estimated from measured current and voltages. Units: KHW
80 EST COST $ Estimated Cost. - Cost of output energy delivered. Estimated from cost of KWH unit parameter
81 R/W ACCESS KEY Access Key. - Parameter security access key. Contact Baldor to decode the key code
82 R/W KEYPAD SOFT VER Keypad Software Version. - Keypad software version string
83 AUTOTUNE TEST RE Autotune test result. Use keypad back/forward keys to review results on the keypad
84 AUTOTUNE TEST RE Autotune test result. Use keypad back/forward keys to review results on the keypad
85 CMD TYPE Command Type. Operating mode input signal command type
86 FPGA READ ERRORS FPGA Read Errors. Number of reads|Errors when reading FPGA since start up
87 FPGA WRITE ERROR FPGA Write Errors. Number of writes|Errors when writing to FPGA since start up
88 FPGA ALARM REG FPGA Alarm Register. Alarm Latch|Alarm Status of Powerbase FPGA
89 REFRESH REQUEST Refresh Request. - Refresh parameter list request from drive to host
90 PHASE 1 VOLTAGE V Phase 1(U) Voltage. - Phase U RMS voltage
91 PHASE 2 VOLTAGE V Phase 2(V) Voltage. - Phase V RMS voltage
92 PHASE 3 VOLTAGE V Phase 3(W) Voltage. - Phase W RMS voltage
93 CUSTOM UNITS CUSTOM Custom Units. - Shows production rates according to custom units.
94 POS REFERENCE CNT Position Reference. - Position Profiler's Current Target Position.
95 POS DEMAND CNT Position Demand. - Position Profiler's Current Position Demand.
96 POS ERROR CNT Position Following Error. - Difference Between Position Demand and Rotor Position.
97 POS COUNTER CNT Position Counter. - Actual 32-bit position of the encoder.
98 LV TEST FEEDBACK LV test feedback. - Gives feedback on state of test
99 LV TEST FE STATE Front End State. - Gives feedback on state of front end
100 ID Power Base ID. - Power Base ID Number. Set by factory
101 AUTOTUNE TEST ST Autotune Test State. - Gives feedback on state of Autotune
102 PROC ERROR % ER Process Error. - Process PID error signal
103 ANA1 REF % Analog Input 1 Reference. - Reference generated from analog input 1
104 ANA2 REF % Analog Input 2 Reference. - Reference generated from analog input 2
105 COMPOSITE REF % Composite Reference. - Reference generated composite reference parameter block.
106 POS MOVE STATUS Position Move Status. - 15 Preset Position Mode status. 0x0=inactive, 0x1-0xF=active,
0x101-0x10F=complete
107 R/W RTC EDGE COUNTER RTC Edge Counter. - General purpose date/time edge counter used in Real Time Clock Features.
108 R/W RTC OUTPUTS RTC Virtual Outputs. - Outputs set by the RTC and mapped to real outputs if enabled.
109 R/W RTC MSG STATUS RTC Message Status. - Individual bits are mapped to RTC message when set
110 LAST POWERDOWN Last Drive Power Down Date. - The date and time the drive was last turned off.
111 R/W COMPONENT A % Component A of Composite Reference. - First part of the composite reference signal.
112 R/W COMPONENT B % Component B of Composite Reference. - First part of the composite reference signal.
113 R/W PLC TIMER A PLC Mode Timer A Counter. - General purpose timer/counter in 10ms clock ticks.
114 R/W PLC TIMER B PLC Mode Timer B Counter. - General purpose timer/counter in 10ms clock ticks.
115 ENC POS FB SPEED % Speed reference set by Pulse Follower EXB.
116 MACRO STATUS ID number of last executed macro (none if no macros have been executed).

9‐2 Monitor and RTC Desciption MN740


Table 9‐1 Monitor Parameter Descriptions Continued
P# P# Name Unit Help
201 LOC SPEED REF Hz Local Speed Reference. - Local speed reference from keypad. Reference can be entered in Hz or RPM
202 E-POT SPEED REF Hz E-Pot Speed Ref. - Electronic pot speed reference
301 FAULT LOG TIME Fault Log Time. Time stamp for fault log entries
302 FAULT LOG MSG Fault Log Message.
501 COUNTS CNT Counts. Accumulated position in encoder pulses per revolution
502 REVOLUTIONS REV Revolutions. Accumulated revolutions since power up. Encoder PPR parameter sets the revolution count
503 OPT1 ANA IN1 V Option 1 Analog Input 1. Option board 1 analog input 1
504 OPT1 ANA IN2 V Option 1 Analog Input 2. Option board 1 analog input 2
505 OPT2 ANA IN1 V Option 2 Analog Input 1. Option board 2 analog input 1
506 OPT2 ANA IN2 V Option 2 Analog Input 2. Option board 2 analog input 2
507 OPT1 ANA OUT1 V Option 1 Analog Output 1. Option board 1 analog output 1
508 OPT1 ANA OUT2 V Option Board 1 Analog Output 2. Option 1 analog output 2
509 OPT2 ANA OUT1 V Option 2 Analog Output 1. Option board 2 analog output 1
510 OPT2 ANA OUT2 V Option 2 Analog Output 2. Option board 2 analog output 2
511 TX CNTS CNT PF Tx Counts. PF transmitted accumulated position in encoder pulses per revolution
512 TX REVS PF Tx Revolutions. PF transmitted accumulated revolutions since power up. Encoder PPR parameter
sets the revolution count
513 RX CNTS CNT PF Rx Counts. PF received accumulated position in encoder pulses per revolution
514 RX REVS PF Rx Revolutions. PF received accumulated revolutions since power up. Encoder PPR parameter sets
the revolution count
515 OPT1 CONFIG1 Option Card 1 Configuration Word 1. Slot 1 option card's general purpose config data from its EE
516 OPT1 CONFIG2 Option Card 1 Configuration Word 2. Slot 1 option card's general purpose config data from its EE
517 OPT1 CONFIG3 Option Card 1 Configuration Word 3. Slot 1 option card's general purpose config data from its EE
518 OPT1 CONFIG4 Option Card 1 Configuration Word 4. Slot 1 option card's general purpose config data from its EE
519 OPT2 CONFIG1 Option Card 2 Configuration Word 1. Slot 2 option card's general purpose config data from its EE
520 OPT2 CONFIG2 Option Card 2 Configuration Word 2. Slot 2 option card's general purpose config data from its EE
521 OPT2 CONFIG3 Option Card 2 Configuration Word 3. Slot 2 option card's general purpose config data from its EE
522 OPT2 CONFIG4 Option Card 2 Configuration Word 4. Slot 2 option card's general purpose config data from its EE
530 OPT1 FIRMWARE Option Card 1 Firmware Version. Option card 1 firmwaer version string
531 OPT2 FIRMWARE Option Card 2 Firmware Version. Option card 2 firmwaer version string
532 OPT1 CONFIG Option Card 1 Configuration Status. Slot 1 option card's configuration status
533 OPT2 CONFIG Option Card 2 Configuration Status. Slot 2 option card's configuration status
534 OPT1 RUN STATUS Option Card 1 Runtime Status. Slot 1 option card's runtime status
535 OPT2 RUN STATUS Option Card 2 Runtime Status. Slot 2 option card's runtime status
536 OPT1 ANA1 REF % Option Card 1 Analog Input 1 Reference. Reference generated from analog input 1 on option card 1
537 OPT1 ANA2 REF % Option Card 1 Analog Input 2 Reference. Reference generated from analog input 2 on option card 1
538 OPT2 ANA1 REF % Option Card 2 Analog Input 1 Reference. Reference generated from analog input 1 on option card 2
539 OPT2 ANA2 REF % Option Card 2 Analog Input 2 Reference. Reference generated from analog input 2 on option card 2
801 FAULT LATCH Fault Latch. Fault trace signal: powerbase fault active high latch
802 ALARM LATCH Alarm Latch. Fault trace signal: powerbase alarm active high latch
803 ADC CURRENT REF V ADC Current Reference. Fault trace signal: ADC 1.5V current reference
804 24V REF V 24V Reference. Fault trace signal: 24v reference
805 USER INPUTS User Digital Inputs. Fault trace signal: user digital inputs
806 DIGITAL OUTPUTS Digital Outputs. Fault trace signal: all digital outputs
807 ANA INPUT 1 V Analog Input 1. Fault trace signal: analog input 1
808 ANA INPUT 2 V Analog Input 2. Fault trace signal: analog input 2
809 SPEED REF Hz Speed Reference. Fault trace signal: speed reference
810 PH1 CURRENT A Phase 1(U) Current. Fault trace signal: motor phase 1 current
811 PH2 CURRENT A Phase 2(V) Current. Fault trace signal: motor phase 2 current
812 PH3 CURRENT A Phase 3(W) Current. Fault trace signal: motor phase 3 current
813 MOTOR CURRENT A Motor Current. Fault trace signal: motor instantaneous RMS current
814 MOTOR TORQUE NM Motor Torque. Fault trace signal: motor instantaneous torque
815 MOTOR VOLTS V Motor Voltage. Fault trace signal: instantaneous voltage to motor
816 MOTOR SPEED RPM Motor Speed. Fault trace signal: motor instantaneous rotor speed
817 BUS VOLTAGE V Bus Voltage. Fault trace signal: instantaneous bus voltage
818 DRIVE TEMP °C Drive Temperature. Fault trace signal: drive temperature

MN740 Monitor and RTC Desciption 9‐3


RTC Overview The RTC Level Three Parameter Block governs the H2 RTC Features.
Action Module
Action Module parameters P3601 - 3602 set the actions to be scheduled. Action 2 takes priority over action 1
should both be scheduled to trigger within the same second. So, if action 1 turns on output 1 and action 2 turns
off output 1 and they both trigger on the same seconds tick, the output 1 will appear as though to never turn on.
As a rule, once an action is taken it is latched until it is reset by another action.
Action Module selections are shown in Table 9‐2.
Figure 9‐1 RTC Features
Action Module H2 Operating Modes
P3601-3602
P3605-3606
P3609-3610
RTC

Message Module H2 Alarm


P3603-3604 System
P3607-3608
P3611-3612

Table 9‐2 Actions (P3601 & 3602)


ID ACTION DESCRIPTION
0 None No action assigned. Default setting.
1 Digital Output 1 On Digital output 1 is turned on. P1501 set to RTC.
2 Digital Output 1 Off Digital output 1 is turned off. P1501set to RTC
3 Digital Output 2 On Digital output 2 is turned on. P1502 set to RTC
4 Digital Output 2 Off Digital output 2 is turned off. P1502 set to RTC
5 Relay Output 1 On Relay output 1 is turned on. P1503 set to RTC
6 Relay Output 1 Off Relay output 1 is turned off. P1503 set to RTC
7 Relay Output 2 On Relay output 2 is turned on. P1504 set to RTC
8 Relay Output 2 Off Relay output 2 is turned off. P1504 set to RTC
9 Increment P107 Increments the RTC counter parameter
10 Decrement P107 Decrements the RTC counter parameter
11 Reset P107 Resets the RTC counter parameter
12 Digital Output 1 On with Inc Performs digital IO with P107 increment
13 Digital Output 1 Off with Inc Performs digital IO with P107 increment
14 Digital Output 1 On with Dec Performs digital IO with P107 decrement
15 Digital Output 1 Off with Dec Performs digital IO with P107 decrement
16 Digital Output 1 On with Reset Performs digital IO with P107 reset
17 Digital Output 1 Off with Reset Performs digital IO with P107 reset
18 Relay Output 1 On with Inc Performs digital IO with P107 increment
19 Relay Output 1 Off with Inc Performs digital IO with P107 increment
20 Relay Output 1 On with Dec Performs digital IO with P107 decrement
21 Relay Output 1 Off with Dec Performs digital IO with P107 decrement
22 Relay Output 1 On with Reset Performs digital IO with P107 reset
23 Relay Output 1 Off with Reset Performs digital IO with P107 reset

Level 1, Output Setup Block parameters P1501-P1504 select the digital/relay output functions.
P107 is the RTC counter parameter.

9‐4 Monitor and RTC Desciption MN740


Message Module (P3603 - 3604)
Message Module parameters P3603 - 3604 set the messages to be scheduled. Message selections are shown
in Table 9‐3.
Table 9‐3 RTC Message 1&2 Parameters
ID MESSAGE HELP TEXT
0 None (default) No message active
1 Clean Filter(s) Time to do periodic cleaning of filter(s)
2 Change Filter(s) Time to change out the filter(s)
3 Apply Oil/Lubricate Apply oil and/or lubricant necessary areas of the system
4 Service Motor Check motor cables, encoder, clean motor etc.
5 Service Drive Check drive cables, clean panels and keypad display etc.
6 Service Coolant System Check coolant pressures/levels, check for leaks, top off as needed
7 Service Heating System Check for gas leaks, clean filters, blowers and connections
8 RTC Alarm Generic real-time clock alarm

RTC Schedule Date Parameters (P3609-3612)


Schedule parameters shown in Table 9‐4 set the start date and time of the actions and messages selected.
Table 9‐4 Schedule Parameters
ID QUALIFIERS DESCRIPTION
0 Once Action/Message is scheduled once to occur on the date and time entered.
1 Every Second Action/Message is scheduled every second. Starting on the date and time entered
and repeated every second thereafter.
2 Every Minute Action/Message is scheduled every minute. Starting on the date and time entered
and repeated every minute thereafter at the same seconds into the minute specified
in the start date and time.
3 Hourly Action/Message is scheduled hourly. Starting on the date and time entered and
repeated every hour thereafter at the same minutes and seconds into the hour as
specified in the start date and time.
4 Daily Action/Message is scheduled Daily. Starting on the date and time entered and
repeated every day thereafter at the same hour, minutes and seconds specified in the
start date and time. If the day specified does not exist for that month the
action/message is skipped.
5 Monthly Action/Message is scheduled monthly. Starting on the date and time entered and
repeated every month thereafter on the same day, hour, minutes and seconds
specified in the start date and time.
6 Yearly Action/Message is scheduled yearly. Starting on the date and time entered and
repeated every year thereafter on the same month, day, hour, minutes and seconds
in the start date and time.

To each action and message there is an associated start date and time. For Action 1 (P3609) is used;
for Action 2 (P3610) and for Messages 1 & 2 (P3611 and P3612) are used respectively.
The internal date and time parameter format is shown in Table 9‐5.
Table 9‐5 Date and Time Format (P0046)
Bits 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fields Year (00–63) Month (1-12) Day (1-31) Hour Hour Bits 4-0 (0-23) Minutes (0-59) Seconds (0-59)
Bit 5

MN740 Monitor and RTC Desciption 9‐5


RTC Counter and Maximum Count Parameters (P107 and P3630)
Monitor parameter P107 is a general purpose RTC Counter that can be assigned as the target of a RTC action.
This parameter may be incremented, decremented or reset by RTC actions.
Parameter number P3630 sets the maximum for P107, so that:
-P3630 = P107 = P3630.
The comparators A&B of the PLC Operating Mode along with the Composite Reference make use of the
maximum setting of a parameter for internal scaling of their operations.

RTC Daylight Saving Time Parameter (P3631)


P3631 has three settings: OFF, U.S.A (United States of America) and E.U. (European Union).
Setting it to OFF disables the DST Feature. Setting it to USA enable Daylight Saving Time for US customers.
Setting it to EU enables Daylight Saving Time for Europe based countries.

Power Cycles and RTC Edit Changes


The RTC acts like an alarm clock during power cycles, edit changes and DST (Daylight Saving Time) updates.
After power up, even though an action/message would have occurred during the power down period no
action/message is issued, that action/message is lost. The next regularly scheduled action/message will trigger
on the next regularly occurring clock edge after power up.
Likewise if the RTC is advanced by some time-offset due to editing or DST action/messages may be lost.
For example, digital output 1 is scheduled to turn on at 1:00 PM daily. At 12:15:00 PM the clock is changed to
1:15:00 PM advancing it an hour. The output will not turn on that day since its triggering edge never occurs.
On the other hand, if the clock is receded by one hour, that is, changed at 1:30:00 PM to 12:30:00 PM then two
triggers for digital output 1 on will have been generated that day since the RTC will have passed through 1:00 PM
twice.
Furthermore, if an active RTC message is not acknowledged by an operator and power is cycled that message
persists after the cycle. The operator must acknowledge an RTC message even if power is cycled.
The same is NOT true for outputs. RTC controlled digital outputs and relays are reset at power up.
RTC Scheduling Examples
The following table gives examples of the kinds scheduled events that may be programmed.
Table 9‐6 Scheduled Events Examples
Action 1 Action 2 Message 1 Message 2
P3601 Digital Out 1 ON
P3602 Digital Out 1 OFF
P3603 Change Filters
P3604 Service Heating System
P3605 Daily
P3606 Daily
P3607 Monthly
P3608 Yearly
3-Feb-07
P3609
01:00:00
3-Feb-07
P3610
02:00:00
10-Jan-06
P3611
13:30:00
10-Jul-06
P3612
13:30:00

For this example assume the drive is in Standard Run Two Wire operating mode with digital output 1 wired to
FWD. The drive would then run daily for one hour from 1:00 AM to 2:00 AM starting February 3, 2007.
The same drive is scheduled for monthly and yearly service. Filters are to be changed on the tenth of every
month after lunch starting January 10, 2006. In addition, once a year on the 10 of July the heating system is
serviced after lunch as well.
RTC messages 1&2 are not logged but must be acknowledged before they are cleared.

9‐6 Monitor and RTC Desciption MN740


RTC Keypad Screens
The following templates shows how these parameters are displayed on the keypad.

Keypad Screen
Line 1 Program Parameter Block Name
Line 2 Parameter Name
Line 3 Parameter List Text1 Qualifier1
Line 4 Month1 Day1 , Year1 Hour1 : Minutes1 : Seconds1
Line 5 A Parameter Number B
Note 1: Field is editable
Line 1 holds the screen's name and parameter block name. Line 2 holds a parameter name. Line 3 holds list
parameter text and the scheduling qualifier. Line 4 holds the date and time. And line 5 holds the A-Function Key
name, a parameter number and the B-Function Key name.
Example one:
Keypad Screen
Line 1 Prog RTC
Line 2 ACTION 1
Line 3 Digital Output 1 ON Daily
Line 4 July 04 2006 01 : 00 : 00
Line 5 Edit C3601T1 Back

Action Description Display Comments


At the Level 3 At the first menu Press  or  to change value.
Programming Menu “RTC ACTION 1” press ENTER. RTC Action Action Press  or  to move cursor to
select RTC FEATURES Action Date & Time Qualifier
Action Qualifier.
Press  or  to change value.
EDIT RTC FEATURES Press  or  to move cursor to
RTC ACTION 1 Date & Time.
None Once Press ENTER when finished and
Jul 04, 2006 01:00:00 save the new value.
See RTC Section of this manual
MAX F0201 RESET for additional details.

Press  to go to the Each RTC parameter can be EDIT RTC FEATURES Press  or  to change value.
next RTC screen. changed by using the procedure Press  or  to move cursor to
described for RTC ACTION 1. RTC ACTION 2 Action Qualifier.
None Once Press  or  to change value.
Jul 04, 2006 01:00:00
Press  or  to move cursor to
Date & Time.
MAX F0201 RESET Press ENTER when finished and
save the new value.
See RTC Section of this manual
for additional details.

Example two:
Keypad Screen
Line 1 Prog RTC
Line 2 MESSAGE 1
Line 3 Change Filter(s) Monthly
Line 4 Jul 17 2010 13 : 30 : 00
Line 5 Diag C3603T1 Back

MN740 Monitor and RTC Desciption 9‐7


9‐8 Monitor and RTC Desciption MN740
Appendix A
Optional Equipment

Dynamic Braking (DB) Hardware Whenever a motor is abruptly stopped or forced to slow down quicker than if allowed to coast to
a stop, the motor becomes a generator. This energy appears on the DC Bus of the control and must be
dissipated using dynamic braking hardware.
Dynamic braking resistors are completely assembled and mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure. A listing of available
RGA assemblies is provided in Table A‐1. Select the braking resistor that has correct ohm value for the control
and adequate continuous watts capacity to meet load requirements.
Table A‐1 Dynamic Braking Resistor Assemblies (RGA)
Input Total * Continuous Rated Watts
HP
Volts Ohms 600 1200 2400 4800 6400 9600 14200
1-7.5 20 RGA620 RGA1220 RGA2420
10-20 6 RGA1206 RGA2406 RGA4806
230
25-40 4 RGA1204 RGA2404 RGA4804
50-60 2 RGA4802 RGA6402 RGA9602 RGA14202
1-3 120 RGA6120 RGA12120 RGA24120
5-7.5 60 RGA660 RGA1260 RGA2460 RGA4860
10 30 RGA630 RGA1230 RGA2430 RGA4830
460
15-25 20 RGA620 RGA1220 RGA2420 RGA4820
30-60 10 RGA1210 RGA2410 RGA4810
75-125 4 RGA1204 RGA2404 RGA4804 RGA6404 RGA9604 RGA14204
1-3 120 RGA6120 RGA12120 RGA24120
5-10 60 RGA660 RGA1260 RGA2460 RGA4860
575 15-25 30 RGA630 RGA1230 RGA2430 RGA4830
30 24 RGA1224 RGA2424 RGA4824
40-125 14 RGA4814 RGA6414

* Note: Total Ohms column indicates the minimum resistance that the output transistors can drive. For example,
if the Total Ohms column indicates 6 ohms and a 6 ohm resistor is unavailable; an 8 ohm can be used but
not a 4 ohm resistor.

Keypad Extension Cable


For the convenience of our customers, we offer a connector plug/cable assembly. This assembly provides the
connectors from the keypad to the control for remote keypad operation.
Caution: Only use cables manufactured by Baldor. Cables purchased from other sources may not
be properly wired and may damage the control or keypad and void the warranty.
Table A‐2 Keypad Extension Cable Selection
Catalog Number Length
CBLHH015KP 5 ft (1.5m)
CBLHH030KP 10 ft (3.0m)
CBLHH046KP 15 ft (4.6m)
CBLHH061KP 20 ft (6.1m)
CBLHH091KP 30 ft (9.1m)
CBLHH152KP 50 ft (15.2m)
CBLHH229KP 75 ft (22.9m)
CBLHH305KP 100 ft (30.5m)
CBLHH457KP 150 ft (45.7m)
CBLHH610KP 200 ft (61.0m)

MN740 Appendix A‐1


Expansion Boards
Baldor offers a wide variety of plug-in expansion boards for the Series H2 Controls. Expansion boards allow a
control to be compatible with various inputs and outputs. Each control can accept up to two expansion boards.
Section 3 of this manual describes the locations of the connectors for these expansion boards.
Table A‐3 Expansion Board Descriptions
Catalog Number Description
EXBHH001A01 or later Ethernet Server Expansion Board
Uses standard RJ-45 female terminal for ethernet connection.
Provides easy connection to any PC based Web Browser that has an Ethernet connection. Allows you
to quickly access all drive parameters for setup and review. Download parameter values, operating
conditions, and fault log data for review and archive.
EXBHH002A01 or later Mint® Expansion Board
Provides standalone single axis Position Control and is programmable in Mint® language. Position
capabilities include Master Axis Follower, Electronic Gearbox, Flying Shears, Registration, Virtual
Master, and CAM functions. Uses MINT Workbench V5 for setup and diagnostics. Master encoder
input supports differential inputs for A, B and C (Index pulse). Uses DB9 for connection. One CAN
open channel is available for connection to additional I/O breakout box or CAN HMI terminal.
Connection to PC is by USB1.1 connector. Includes CD Rom and 2m USB cable.
EXBHH003A01 or later Isolated Input Expansion Board
Contains 9 isolated inputs, jumper configurable for 90-130 VAC. All inputs must be the same voltage.
One side of all inputs is common. This board replaces all the opto inputs on the main control board.
Uses screw terminals for connection.
EXBHH005A01 or later High resolution analog board
Allows two inputs with up to 16 bits resolution.
DC inputs: ±10V, 0-10V, ±5V, 0-5V, with 300 microvolt resolution.
Current inputs: 4-20 mA, with 0.6 microamps resolution.
Input Resolution
±10 V 16 bit
0 - 10 V 15 bit
±5 V 15 bit
0-5V 14 bit
0 - 20 mA 15 bit
4 - 20 mA 15 bit
Both the 0-10 V and 4-20 mA inputs may be inverted to 10-0 V and 20-4 mA.
Two outputs, each with ±10 VDC, 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA with inverting capability.
These are in addition to the two analog outputs on the main control board (4 total).
Uses screw terminals for connection.
EXBHH007A01 or later Master Pulse Reference / Isolated Pulse Follower
Jumper selection of the following modes:
1. Accepts a 5VDC or 12VDC quadrature pulse train input or pulse and direction input to use as a
master reference.
2. Re-transmits the input pulse train at 5VDC for ratios from 1:20 up to 65535:1. (Scaled output).
3. Can be used as a auxiliary encoder input to the control.
4. A CANopen port with an RJ-45 female connector for adding an additional I/O breakout box or
CAN HMI terminal.
EXBHH012A01 or later Ethernet IP Communications Expansion Board
Allows connection to Ethernet IP Communications Bus. Uses plug-in terminals for connection.
EXBHH013A01 or later DeviceNet Expansion Board
Allows connection to DeviceNet Communications Bus. Uses plug-in terminals for connection.
EXBHH014A01 or later Profibus DP Expansion Board
Allows connection to Profibus Communications Bus. Uses plug-in terminals for connection.
EXBHH016A01 or later LonWorks Communications Expansion Board
Allows connection to LonWorks Communications Bus. Uses plug-in terminals for connection.

A‐2 Appendix MN740


Series H to H2 Conversion When an existing Series H control is removed and a new Series H2 control is to be
installed in it's place, existing wires can be used. These illustrations show how to make
the new connections using existing wires. Power and Motor connections are not shown.
For detailed information refer to MN743.

I/O Connections From a Series H to an H2 Control


J1 or J4
Existing Wires
Analog GND 1 1 Analog GND
Analog Input 1 2 2 Analog Input 1
Pot Reference 3 3 Pot Reference
Analog Input +2 J1
4 4 Analog Input +2
Analog Input -2 5 5 Analog Input -2
Analog Out 1 6 6 Analog Out 1
Analog Out 2 7 7 Analog Out 2 Note factory connection of J2-8 (En‐
(Enable) Input 1 8 8 Enable able) to J3-24.
Input 2 9 9 Digital Input 1
Input 3 10 10 Digital Input 2
Input 4 11 11 J2 Digital Input 3
Input 5 12 12 Digital Input 4
Input 6 13 13 Digital Input 5
Input 7 14 14 Digital Input 6
Input 8 15 15 Digital Input 7
Input 9 16 16 Digital Input 8
Opto In Common 17 17 Digital Output1+
Opto Out Common * 18 18 Digital Output1-
Opto Out #1 * 19 19 Digital Output2+
Opto Out #2 * 20 20 Digital Output2-
Relay Out #1 21 External User Return
22 21
Relay Out #2 22 External User +24V
+24VDC 23 Internal +24VDC
39 J3 Internal 24VDC
Opto In Power 24 Internal Return
40 25
Opto Out #1 Return 41 Relay Out1 NC
* 26 Relay Out1 COM
Opto Out #2 Return * 42
43 27 Relay Out1 NO Active Low
Relay Out #1 Return
44 28 Relay Out2 NC JP6
Relay Out #2 Return
29 Relay Out2 COM ENP INP
30 Relay Out2 NO
JP5
* For OPTO Connections see Digital Output EPN DFT
Connections Diagrams. Remove Series H2
Series H Signal Connections

Refer to Tightening torque


specifications in Section 6.

Continued on next page

MN740 Appendix A‐3


Digital Output Connections (2 Opto Outputs/2 Relay Outputs)
Load
Load

Load
Load

Load
Load

Load
Load
J1 or J4 J2 J1 or J4 J2
17 17 Digital Output1+ 17 17 Digital Output1+
Opto Out Common 18 18 Digital Output1- Opto Out Common 18 18 Digital Output1-
Opto Out #1 19 19 Digital Output2+ Opto Out #1 19 19 Digital Output2+
Opto Out #2 20 20 Digital Output2- Opto Out #2 20 20 Digital Output2-
Relay Out #1 21 External User Return Relay Out #1 21 External User Return
22 21 22 21
Relay Out #2 22 External User Power Relay Out #2 22 External User Power
23 Int. +24VDC Internal 23 Int. +24VDC Internal
+24VDC 39 J3 24VDC +24VDC 39 J3 24VDC
24 Int. Return 24 Int. Return
Opto In Power 40 Opto In Power 40
41 25 Relay Out1 NC 41 25 Relay Out1 NC
Opto Out #1 Return 26 Opto Out #1 Return 26 Relay Out1 COM
42 Relay Out1 COM 42
Opto Out #2 Return 27 Opto Out #2 Return 27
43 Relay Out1 NO 43 Relay Out1 NO
Relay Out #1 Return 28 Relay Out #1 Return 28 Relay Out2 NC
44 Relay Out2 NC 44
Relay Out #2 Return 29 Relay Out #2 Return 29 Relay Out2 COM
Relay Out2 COM
30 Relay Out2 NO 30 Relay Out2 NO
Series H Series H
Connections Series H2 Connections Series H2
Connections Connections
(Internal Supply, Sinking) (Internal Supply, Sourcing)

Digital Output Connections (4 Opto Outputs)


Load
Load
Load
Load

Load
Load
Load
Load

Load
Load
Load
Load

Load
Load
Load
Load
J1 or J4 J2 J1 or J4 J2
17 17 Digital Output1+ 17 17 Digital Output1+
Opto Out Common 18 18 Digital Output1- Opto Out Common 18 18 Digital Output1-
Opto Out #1 19 19 Digital Output2+ Opto Out #1 19 19 Digital Output2+
Opto Out #2 20 20 Digital Output2- Opto Out #2 20 20 Digital Output2-
Opto Out #3 21 External User Return Opto Out #3 21 21 External User Return
22 21 22 External User Power
Opto Out #4 22 External User Power Opto Out #4 22
Internal 23 Int. +24VDC Internal
23 Int. +24VDC
+24VDC 39 J3 24VDC +24VDC 39 24 J3 Int. Return 24VDC
40 24 Int. Return 40
Opto In Power Opto In Power 25 Relay Out1 NC
41 25 Relay Out1 NC 41
Opto Out #1 Return Opto Out #1 Return 26 Relay Out1 COM
42 26 Relay Out1 COM 42
Opto Out #2 Return Opto Out #2 Return 27 Relay Out1 NO
43 27 Relay Out1 NO 43
Opto Out #3 Return Opto Out #3 Return 28 Relay Out2 NC
44 28 Relay Out2 NC 44
Opto Out #4 Return Relay Out2 COM Opto Out #4 Return 29 Relay Out2 COM
29
30 Relay Out2 NO 30 Relay Out2 NO
Series H Series H
Connections Series H2 Connections Series H2
Connections Connections
(Internal Supply, Sinking) (Internal Supply, Sourcing)

A‐4 Appendix MN740


Appendix B

Parameter Values (Version 1.06)


All parameters displayed in this appendix are Parameter Table 1 (T1) factory set values. Setting parameter
P2103 to yes will load these values into all four parameter tables.
Level 1 & 2 parameters are secured by security access code (P2107).
Table B‐1 Parameter Block Values Level 1
Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
PRESET PRESET SPEED 1 1001 0-MAX Speed 1
SPEEDS PRESET SPEED 2 1002 0-MAX Speed 2
PRESET SPEED 3 1003 0-MAX Speed 3
PRESET SPEED 4 1004 0-MAX Speed 4
PRESET SPEED 5 1005 0-MAX Speed 5
PRESET SPEED 6 1006 0-MAX Speed 6
PRESET SPEED 7 1007 0-MAX Speed 7
PRESET SPEED 8 1008 0-MAX Speed 8
PRESET SPEED 9 1009 0-MAX Speed 9
PRESET SPEED 10 1010 0-MAX Speed 10
PRESET SPEED 11 1011 0-MAX Speed 11
PRESET SPEED 12 1012 0-MAX Speed 12
PRESET SPEED 13 1013 0-MAX Speed 13
PRESET SPEED 14 1014 0-MAX Speed 14
PRESET SPEED 15 1015 0-MAX Speed 15
RAMP RATES ACCEL TIME 1 1101 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 3.0
START S-ACCEL 1 1102 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
END S-ACCEL 1 1103 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
DECEL TIME 1 1104 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 3.0
START S-DECEL 1 1105 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
END S-DECEL 1 1106 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
ACCEL TIME 2 1107 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 3.0
START S-ACCEL 2 1108 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
END S-ACCEL 2 1109 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
DECEL TIME 2 1110 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 3.0
START S-DECEL 2 1111 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
END S-DECEL 2 1112 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
JOG SETTINGS JOG SPEED 1201 0-MAX Speed 7.00
JOG ACCEL TIME 1202 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 10.0
JOG START S-ACCEL 1203 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
JOG END S-ACCEL 1204 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
JOG DECEL TIME 1205 0.0 to 3600.0 Seconds 10.0
JOG START S-DECEL 1206 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
JOG END S-DECEL 1207 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
JOG FORWARD 1209 0-OFF, 1-ON 1
JOG REVERSE 1210 0-OFF, 1-ON 1

MN740 Appendix B‐1


Table B‐1 Parameter Block Values Level 1 Continued
Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
KEYPAD SETUP STOP KEY 1301 0-OFF (Keypad Stop inactive in remote). 1
1-ON (Keypad Stop active remote).
STOP MODE 1302 0-Coast, 1-Regen 1
RUN FORWARD 1303 0-OFF, 1-ON 1
RUN REVERSE 1304 0-OFF, 1-ON 1
SWITCH ON FLY 1305 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
LOCAL HOT START 1306 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
SPEED INCREMENT 1307 0.01 TO 60.00 Hz 1.00
INIT LOCAL SPEED 1308 0-Zero, 1-Last Speed, 2-Set Speed 0
SET SPEED 1309 0.01 TO 60.00 Hz 1.00
PARAMS TO KEYPAD 1310 0-NO, 1-YES 0
DOWNLOAD SELECT 1311 0-All, 1-Motor, 2-Other 0
KEYPAD TO PARAMS 1312 0-NO, 1-YES 0
KEYPAD CONTRAST 1313 0-100% (0=dimmest, 100=brightest) 50
BACKLIGHT 1314 0-OFF, 1-ON 1
LOCAL TORQUE MODE 1315 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
LOCAL TORQUE REF 1316 -100.00 TO 100.00% 0.00
INPUT SETUP OPERATING MODE 1401 0-KEYP AD 0
1-ST ANDARD RUN 2Wire
2-ST ANDARD RUN 3Wire
3-15 PRESET SPEEDS
4-F AN&PUMP 2WIRE
5-F AN&PUMP 3WIRE
6-PROCESS CONTROL
7-3SPD ANA 2WIRE
8-3SPD ANA 3WIRE
9-E-POT 2WIRE
10-E-POT 3WIRE
11-NETWORK
12-PROFILE RUN
13-BIPOLAR
14-PLC
COMMAND SOURCE 1402 0-NONE, 1-ANALOG INPUT1, 1
2-ANALOG INPUT2, 3-KEYPAD,
4-NETWORK, 5-COMPOSITE, 6-EXB
Pulse FOL
ANA IN1 TYPE 1403 0-None, 1-Potentiometer 1
ANA IN1 INVERT 1404 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
ANA IN1 GAIN 1405 0.0% TO 300.0% 100.0
ANA IN1 OFFSET 1406 -100.0% TO 100.0% 0.0
ANA IN1 FILTER 1407 0 (No Filter) TO 6 (Max Filter) 0
ANA IN2 TYPE 1408 0-None, 1-(-10V to+10V), 2-(-5V to+5V), 1
3-(4 to20mA), 4-(0 to20mA),
5-(0 to 10V), 6-(0 to 5V)
ANA IN2 INVERT 1409 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
ANA IN2 GAIN 1410 0.0% TO 300.0% 100.0
ANA IN2 OFFSET 1411 -100.0% TO 100.0% 0.0
ANA IN2 DEADBAND 1412 0.0% TO 75.0% 0.0
ANA IN2 FILTER 1413 0 (No Filter) TO 6 (Max Filter) 0
EXT. CURRENT LIMIT 1414 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
CURRENT LIMIT SOURCE 1415 0-None, 1-Analog In1, 2-Analog In2, 0
3-Keypad, 4-Composite
SLEEP MODE 1416 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
CMD SLEEP BAND 1417 0.00 TO 100.00% 0.00
TORQUE FF SOURCE 1418 0-None, 1-Analog In1, 2-Analog In2, 0
3-Keypad, 4-Composite

Only available or active in Open Loop Vector mode. Ignore these parameters for V/F mode.

B‐2 Appendix MN740


Table B‐1 Parameter Block Values Level 1 Continued
Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
OUTPUT SETUP DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 1501 0-DRIVE RUN 1
1-DRIVE READY
2-DRIVE ON
3-DRIVE STOPPED
4-JOG
5-ACCELERATE
6-CONST ANT SPEED
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 1502 7-DECELERATE 8
8-A T ZERO SPEED
9-A T SPEED
10-A T SET SPEED
11-CURRENT OVERLOAD
12-CURRENT UNDERLOAD
13-I 2T OVERLOAD
RELAY OUTPUT 1 1503 14-KEYP AD CONTROL 9
15-DYNAMIC BRAKE
16-FOLDBACK
17-F AULT
18-ALARM
19-COMMAND FORWARD
20-COMMAND REVERSE
RELAY OUTPUT 2 1504 21-MOT OR FORWARD 17
22-MOT OR REVERSE
23-PROCESS ERROR
24-NETWORK
25-PLC
26-R TC
27-POWERED UP
ZERO SPD SET PT 1505 0-MAX Speed 6.00
AT SPEED BAND 1506 0‐100 RPM 2.00
SET SPEED POINT 1507 0-MAX Speed 60.00
OVERLOAD SET POINT 1508 0.0-200.0% 150.0
UNDERLOAD SET POINT 1509 0.0-200.0% 50.0
ANALOG OUT1 TYPE 1510 0-(0 TO +10V), 1-(0 TO 5V), 0
2-(4mA TO 20mA), 3-(0mA TO 20mA)

MN740 Appendix B‐3


Table B‐1 Parameter Block Values Level 1 Continued
OUTPUT SETUP ANALOG OUT1 SIGNAL 1511 0-SPEED REF 29
1-SPEED DEMAND
2-ACC/DEC
3-MOT OR CURRENT
4-MAG CURRENT
5-MAG CURRENT COMMAND
6-LOAD CURRENT
7-LOAD CURRENT COMMAND
8-POWER FACTOR
9-PH1 CURRENT
10-PH2 CURRENT
11-PH3 CURRENT
12-MOT OR VOLTAGE
13-VD DEMAND
14-VQ DEMAND
15-BUS VOLTAGE
16-ABS TORQUE
17-T ORQUE
ANALOG OUT2 SIGNAL 1514 18-CONTROL TEMP 3
19-ANALOG INPUT 1
20-ANALOG INPUT 2
21-OPT1 ANA IN1
22-OPT1 ANA IN2
23-OPT2 ANA IN1
24-OPT2 ANA IN2
25-PROC FEEDFORWARD
26-PROC FEEDBACK
27-PROC SETPOINT
28-ELECTRIC ANGLE
29-ABS SPEED
30-VELOCITY
31-NETWORK
32-COMPOSITE REF
33-POWER (KW)
34-CALIBRATE
ANALOG OUT1 GAIN 1512 0.0‐200.0% 100.0
ANALOG OUT2 TYPE 1513 0-(+/-5V), 1-(+/-10V) 1
ANALOG OUT2 GAIN 1515 0.0‐200.0% 100.0
CALIBRATE ANALOG OUT 1516 -100.0% TO 100.0% 0.0

B‐4 Appendix MN740


Table B‐1 Parameter Block Values Level 1 Continued
Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
MOTOR CONTROL CONTROL TYPE 1601 0-V/F Control, 1-Open Vector 0
CONTROL BASE SPEED 1602 10.00-500.00 Hz 60.00
CONTROL BASE VOLTS 1611 0- Motor Voltage (P2401) CALC
STATIC BOOST 1612 0.0-15.0% 2.0
DYNAMIC BOOST CUTIN 1613 6.00-60.00 Hz 30.00
DYNAMIC BOOST 1614 0.0-10.0% 0.0
V/F EFFICIENCY 1615 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
V/F PROFILE 1616 0.0-100.0% 0.0
3 POINT METHOD 1617 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
3 POINT VOLTAGE 1618 0.0‐100.0% 0.0
3 POINT FREQUENCY 1619 0.00-60.00 Hz 30.00
SLIP COMP ENABLE 1620 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
CURRENT PROP GAIN 1633 0-255 CALC
CURRENT INT GAIN 1634 0.0-500.00Hz 150.00
SPEED PROP GAIN 1635 0.0-255.0 CALC
SPEED INT GAIN 1636 0.00-50.00Hz 4.00
SPEED DIFF GAIN 1637 0.00-200.00 0.00
A.S. PROP GAIN 1639 0.0-255.0 CALC
A.S. INTEGRAL GAIN 1640 0.00-200.00Hz 50.00
MOTOR Xm 1641 0.00-1000.00 Ohms CALC
MOTOR R1 1642 0.000-1000.000 Ohms CALC
MOTOR X1 1643 0.000-1000.000 Ohms CALC
ROTOR TIME CONSTANT 1644 0.000-60.000 Ohms CALC
MOTOR R2 1645 0-1000 Ohms CALC
MOTOR X2 1646 0-1000 Ohms CALC
COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE 1701 0-9600, 1-19200, 2-38400, 3-56000, 1
4-1 15200
PARITY 1702 0-None, 1-Odd, 2-Even 0
STOP BITS 1703 0-One, 1-Two 0
DRIVE ADDRESS 1704 1-247 1
OPTION CARD RESET 1705 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
SECURITY DEFAULT 1706 0-NO, 1-YES NO
BROWSER USER ID 1707 baldor
BROWSER PASSWORD 1709 baldor

Only available or active in Open Loop Vector mode. Ignore these parameters for V/F mode.
 Only available or active in V/F mode. Ignore these parameters for Open Loop Vector mode.

MN740 Appendix B‐5


Table B‐2 Parameter Block Values Level 2
Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
DRIVE LIMITS OPERATING ZONE 2001 0-STD CONST TORQUE 0
1-STD VAR TORQUE
2-QUIET CONST TORQUE
3-QUIET VAR TORQUE
MIN OUTPUT SPEED 2002 0-MAX Speed 0.00
MAX OUTPUT SPEED 2003 0.00 TO 500.00 Hz 60.00
PWM FREQUENCY 2004 1500 TO 16000 Hz 2500
CUR RATE LIMIT 2005 0.000‐10.000 seconds 0.004
PEAK CURRENT LEVEL 2006 0.000-Peak Rated Current CALC
REGEN TORQUE LIMIT 2007 0.0 to Peak Amps-Mag CALC
DRIVE CONFIGURE SPEED UNITS 2101 0-Hz, 1-RPM 0
LANGUAGE SELECT 2102 0-English, 1-Other (Spanish, German, 0
Italian, French, or Portuguese)
FACTORY SETTINGS 2103 0-NO, 1-YES 0
SECURITY 2105 0-Of f, 1-Local, 2-Network, 3-Total 0
ACCESS TIMEOUT 2106 1.0-600.0 seconds 5.0
ACCESS CODE 2107 0-9999 9999
ACTIVE PARAM TABLE 0052 0-T1, 1-T2, 2-T3, 3- T4, 0
CLEAR FAULT LOG 2108 0-NO, 1-YES 0
DEAD TIME COMP 2109 0.0-100.0% 100.0
POWER INPUT 2110 0-Single, 1-Common Bus, 2-Three 2
 BUS VOLT FILTER 2111 0.10-1000.00 Hz 10.00
EXECUTE MACRO 2112 0-NO, 1-M1, 2-M2, 3-M3, 4-M4, 5-M5 0
UNDO MACRO 2113 0-NO, 1-YES 0
DRIVE PROTECT EXTERNAL TRIP 2201 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
FOLLOWING ERROR 2202 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
TORQUE PROVING 2203 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
FOLDBACK GAIN 2205 0.000-10.000% 0.010
OVERLOAD 2206 0-Fault, 1-Foldback, 2-Hold 0
OVERLOAD TRIGGER 2207 0.0-100.0% 50.0
SINGLE PHASING 2209 0-Derate, 1-Fault 1
OVER TEMPERATURE 2210 0-Derate, 1-Fault 1

Only available or active in Open Loop Vector mode. Ignore these parameters for V/F mode.
 Only available or active in V/F mode. Ignore these parameters for Open Loop Vector mode.
 Not available for size AA controls.

B‐6 Appendix MN740


Table B‐2 Parameter Block Values Level 2 Continued
Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
MISCELLANEOUS AUTO RESTART 2301 0-Manual, 1-Automatic 0
RESTARTS/HOUR 2302 0‐10 3
RESTART DELAY 2303 0‐3600 seconds 3
PWM TECHNIQUE 2304 0-Space Vector, 1-Sine Triangle 1
COST OF ENERGY 2305 0.00-99999.00$/KWH 0.10
RESET ENERGY 2306 0-NO, 1-YES 0
FILTER TYPE 2309 0-None, 1-Low Pass, 0
2-High Pass, 3-Notch
FILTER SOURCE 2310 0-None, 1-Raw Speed, 2-Torque, 0
3-Analog In1, 4-Analog In2
5-Composite REF
6-OPT1 ANA IN 1, 7-OPT1 ANA IN 2,
8-OPT2 ANA IN 1, 9-OPT2 ANA IN 2
FILTER DESTINATION 2311 0-None, 1-Speed Loop, 0
2-Torque Loop, 3-Speed FFWD,
4-Process FBK, 5-Process FFWD,
6-Process SP
FILTER CUTOFF 2312 0.00-1000.00Hz 0.00
NOTCH CENTER FREQ 2313 0.00-500.00Hz 0.00
NOTCH BAND 2314 0.00-200.00Hz 0.00
MOTOR DATA MOTOR RATED VOLT 2401 0-1000 Volts CALC
MOTOR RATED AMPS 2402 0- AMP CALC
MOTOR RATED SPEED 2403 0-30000 RPM 1754
MOTOR RATED FREQUENCY 2404 0.00-120.00Hz 60.00
MOTOR MAG AMPS 2405 0-8.6 AMPS CALC
INSTABILITY FREQUENCY 2406 0.00-500.00Hz 20.00
STABILITY GAIN 2407 0.000-10.000 0.300
ELECTRICAL SLIP FREQ 2412 0.00-20.00Hz CALC
CALCULATE MOTOR MODEL 2414 0-NO, 1-YES 0
REVERSE ROTATION 2415 0-OFF, 1-ON 0

Only available or active in Open Loop Vector mode. Ignore these parameters for V/F mode.
 Only available or active in V/F mode. Ignore these parameters for Open Loop Vector mode.

MN740 Appendix B‐7


Table B‐2 Parameter Block Values Level 2 Continued
Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
BRAKE ADJUST RESISTOR OHMS 2501 0‐255.0 Ohms CALC
RESISTOR WATTS 2502 0‐999999 Watts CALC
RESISTOR THERMAL TIME 2503 20-3600 seconds CALC
CONSTANT
DC BRAKE VOLTS 2504 0-20.00% 0.00
DC BRAKE TRIGGER 2505 0.00-50.00 Hz 0.00
BRAKE ON STOP 2506 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
BRAKE ON REVERSE 2507 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
STOP BRAKE TIME 2508 0.0-60.0 seconds 0.0
BRAKE ON START 2509 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
START BRAKE TIME 2510 0.0-60.0 seconds 0.0
PROCESS PROCESS TYPE 2601 0-None, 1-Forward Acting, 0
CONTROL 2-Reverse Acting
SETPOINT ADJUST LIMIT 2602 0.0-100.0% 10.0
PROCESS FEEDBACK 2603 0-None, 1-Setpoint CMD, 0
2-Local Speed REF. 3-Analog In1,
4-Analog In2, 5-Network
SETPOINT SOURCE 2604 6-Composite 0
7-OPT1 ANA IN 1, 8-OPT1 ANA IN 2,
9-OPT2 ANA IN 1, 10-OPT2 ANA IN 2
SETPOINT COMMAND 2605 -100.0% to +100.0% 0.0
PROCESS ERROR TOLERANCE 2606 0.0‐100.0% 10.0
PROCESS PROP GAIN 2607 0.0000‐9999.9990 1.0000
PROCESS INTG GAIN 2608 0.0000‐9999.9990 0.0000
PROCESS INTG CLAMP 2609 0.0-100.0% 100.0
PROCESS DIFF GAIN 2610 0.0000‐9999.9990 0.0000
PROFILE ADJUST 2611 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
PROFILE ADJUST BAND 2612 0.0-200.0% 50.0
PROCESS SLEEP BAND 2613 0.0-100.0% 0.0
PROCESS OUTPUT FILTER 2614 0.0-100.0 seconds 0.00
PROCESS OUTPUT OFFSET 2615 -100.0-100.0% 0.0
PROCESS OUTPUT GAIN 2616 0.0-200.0% 100.0
SKIP FREQUENCY SKIP FREQ 1 2701 0-MAX Speed 0.00
SKIP BAND 1 2702 0-MAX Speed 0.00
SKIP FREQ 2 2703 0-MAX Speed 0.00
SKIP BAND 2 2704 0-MAX Speed 0.00
SKIP FREQ 3 2705 0-MAX Speed 0.00
SKIP BAND 3 2706 0-MAX Speed 0.00

Only available or active in Open Loop Vector mode. Ignore these parameters for V/F mode.
 Only available or active in V/F mode. Ignore these parameters for Open Loop Vector mode.

B‐8 Appendix MN740


Table B‐2 Parameter Block Values Level 2 Continued
Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
SYNCHRO START SYNC START FWD 2801 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
SYNC START REV 2802 0-OFF, 1-ON 0
SYNC AT MAX FREQ 2803 0-OFF, 1-ON 1
SYNCHRO SCAN V/F 2804 1.0-100.0% 10.0 / 10.0
SYNC SETUP TIME 2805 0.0-5.00 seconds 0.20 / 0.10
SYNC SCAN TIME 2806 0.5-10.0 seconds 2.0 / 0.50
SYNC RECOVER 2807 0.5-10.0 seconds 1.0 / 0.10
AUTO TUNE ANALOG OFFSET TRIM 2901 0-NO, 1-YES 0
ONE-STEP TUNING 2902 0-NO, 1-YES 0
STATOR R1 TUNE 2903 0-NO, 1-YES 0
MEASURE XM 2904 0-NO, 1-YES 0
MEASURE LEAKAGE 2905 0-NO, 1-YES 0
CURRENT LOOP TUNE 2906 0-NO, 1-YES 0
FLUX CUR TUNE 2907 0-NO, 1-YES 0

Table B‐3 Parameter Block Values Level 3


Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
PROFILE RUN NUMBER OF CYCLES 3001 0-255 0
PR RESTART MODE 3002 0-Restart, 1-Continue 0
SPEED CURVE 1 3003 0-FWD-Group1, 1-REV-Group1, 0
2-FWD-Group2, 3-REV-Group2
PROFILE TIME 1 3004 0-65535.00 seconds 0.00
SPEED CURVE 2 3005 0-FWD-Group1, 1-REV-Group1, 0
2-FWD-Group2, 3-REV-Group2
PROFILE TIME 2 3006 0-65535.00 seconds 0.00
SPEED CURVE 3 3007 0-FWD-Group1, 1-REV-Group1, 0
2-FWD-Group2, 3-REV-Group2
PROFILE TIME 3 3008 0-65535.00 seconds 0.00
SPEED CURVE 4 3009 0-FWD-Group1, 1-REV-Group1, 0
2-FWD-Group2, 3-REV-Group2
PROFILE TIME 4 3010 0-65535.00 seconds 0.00
SPEED CURVE 5 3011 0-FWD-Group1, 1-REV-Group1, 0
2-FWD-Group2, 3-REV-Group2
PROFILE TIME 5 3012 0-65535.00 seconds 0.00
SPEED CURVE 6 3013 0-FWD-Group1, 1-REV-Group1, 0
2-FWD-Group2, 3-REV-Group2
PROFILE TIME 6 3014 0-65535.00 seconds 0.00
SPEED CURVE 7 3015 0-FWD-Group1, 1-REV-Group1, 0
2-FWD-Group2, 3-REV-Group2
PROFILE TIME 7 3016 0-65535.00 seconds 0.00
CUSTOM UNITS MAX DECIMAL PLACES 3201 0-5 1
VALUE AT SPEED 3202 X.X ; YRPM 0.0
UNITS OF MEASURE 3203 CUSTOM
See Section 4

Only available or active in Open Loop Vector mode. Ignore these parameters for V/F mode.
 Only available or active in V/F mode. Ignore these parameters for Open Loop Vector mode.
 Only available or active in V/F or Open Vector mode. Factory settings are different depending on mode (V/F or / Open Vector).
Note: In Open Vector mode, it is recommended that these values remain at the factory settings.

MN740 Appendix B‐9


Table B‐3 Parameter Block Values Level 3 Continued
Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
PLC MODE PLC CONFIG 1 3401 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 2 3402 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 3 3403 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 4 3404 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 5 3405 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 6 3406 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 7 3407 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 8 3408 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 9 3409 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 10 3410 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 11 3411 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 12 3412 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 13 3413 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 14 3414 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 15 3415 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
PLC CONFIG 16 3416 0 TO 255.255.255.255 000.128.000.000
COMPARE A PARAMETER 3431 00000 TO 10000 0
COMPARE A CONSTANT 3432 0.00 TO 100.00% 0.00
COMPARE B PARAMETER 3433 00000 TO 10000 0
COMPARE B CONSTANT 3434 0.00 TO 100.00% 0.00
TIMER A DURATION 3440 0.00 TO 999.99 seconds 0.00
TIMER A DURATION 3441 0.00 TO 999.99 seconds 0.00
COMPOSITE REF PARAMETER A NUMBER 3501 00000 TO 10000 0
PARAMETER B NUMBER 3503 00000 TO 10000 0
PARAMETER A FUNCTION 3502 0-ZERO ZERO
1-IDENTITY
2-ABSOLUTE VALUE
PARAMETER B FUNCTION 3504 3-INVER T ZERO
4-SQUARE
5-SQUARE ROOT
6-SINE
FUNCTION 3506 7-COSINE ZERO
8-RAMP GENERATOR
9-FREQ GENERATOR
OPERATOR 3505 0-SUM SUM
1-DIFFERENCE
2-MULTIPLY
3-DIVIDE
4-MAXIMUM
5-MINIMUM
PARAMETER A GAIN 3507 0.000 TO 1000.000 1.000
PARAMETER B GAIN 3508 0.000 TO 1000.000 1.000

B‐10 Appendix MN740


Table B‐3 Parameter Block Values Level 3 Continued
Block Title Parameter P# Adjustable Range Factory User Setting
RTC FEATURES RTC ACTION 1 3601 0-None, 1-D.Out1 ON, 2-D.Out1 OFF, None
(Real Time Clock) 3-D.Out2 ON, 4-D.Out2 OFF,
5-R.Out1 ON, 6-R.Out1 Off,
7-R.Out2 ON, 8-R.Out2 Off,
9-Increment, 10-Decrement, 11-Reset,
12-D.Out1 On/IncP107, 13-D.Out1 Off/IncP107,
RTC ACTION 2 3602 14-D.Out1 On/DecP107, 15-D.Out1 Off/DecP107, None
16-D.Out1 On/Reset, 17-D.Out1 Off/Reset,
18-R.Out1 On/IncP107, 19-R.Out1 Off/IncP107,
20-R.Out1 On/DecP107, 21-R.Out1 Off/DecP107,
22-R.Out1 On/Reset, 23-R.Out1 Off/Reset
RTC MESSAGE 1 3603 0-None, 1-Clean Filter, 2-Change Filter, None
3-Apply Oil/Lube, 4-Service Motor,
RTC MESSAGE 2 3604 5-Service Drive, 6-Service Coolant, None
7-Service Heating, 8-RTC Alarm
ACTION 1 QUALIFIER 3605 0-Once, 1-Second, 2-Minute, 3-Hourly, Once
4-Daily , 5-Monthly, 6-Yearly
ACTION 2 QUALIFIER 3606 Once
MESSAGE 1 QUALIFIER 3607 Once
MESSAGE 2 QUALIFIER 3608 Once
ACTION 1 DATE/TIME 3639 MM DD, YYYY Jan 01,2000
HH:MM:SS 00:00:00
ACTION 2 DATE/TIME 3610 MM DD, YYYY Jan 01,2000
HH:MM:SS 00:00:00
MESSAGE 1 DATE/TIME 3611 MM DD, YYYY Jan 01,2000
HH:MM:SS 00:00:00
MESSAGE 2 DATE/TIME 3612 MM DD, YYYY Jan 01,2000
HH:MM:SS 00:00:00
RTC COUNTER MAX 3630 00000-99999 60
Daylight Saving Time 3631 0-OFF, 1-U.S.A, 2-E.U. OFF
SELECT

MN740 Appendix B‐11


B‐12 Appendix MN740
Appendix C
CE Guidelines

CE Declaration of Conformity
Baldor indicates that the products are only components and not ready for immediate or instant use within
the meaning of “Safety law of appliance”, “EMC Law” or “Machine directive”.
The final mode of operation is defined only after installation into the user's equipment. It is the responsibility
of the user to verify compliance.

EMC - Conformity and CE - Marking


The information contained herein is for your guidance only and does not guarantee that the installation will
meet the requirements of the council directive 89/336/EEC.
The purpose of the EEC directives is to state a minimum technical requirement common to all the member
states within the European Union. In turn, these minimum technical requirements are intended to enhance
the levels of safety both directly and indirectly.
Council directive 89/336/EEC relating to Electro Magnetic Compliance (EMC) indicates that it is the
responsibility of the system integrator to ensure that the entire system complies with all relative directives at
the time of installing into service.
Motors and controls are used as components of a system, per the EMC directive. Hence all components,
installation of the components, interconnection between components, and shielding and grounding of the
system as a whole determines EMC compliance.
The CE mark does not inform the purchaser which directive the product complies with. It rests upon the
manufacturer or his authorized representative to ensure the item in question complies fully with all the
relative directives in force at the time of installing into service, in the same way as the system integrator
previously mentioned. Remember, it is the instructions of installation and use, coupled with the product, that
comply with the directive.
Wiring of Shielded (Screened) Cables

Conductive
Remove the outer insulation to ex‐
Clamp
pose the overall screen.

Shielded Couplings
360 Degree
Coupling

360 Degree Coupling Conductive


360 degree Clamp

EMC Installation Options


When installed for Class A or Class B operation, the control is compliant with EN55011 (1991)/ EN55022
(1994) for radiated emissions as described.
Grounding for Wall Mounting (Class A) also see Section 3
Top cover must be installed.
 A single-star point (earth) is required.
 The protective earth connection (PE) to the motor must be run inside the screened cable or
conduit between the motor and control and be connected to the protective earth terminal at the
control.
 The internal/external AC supply filter must be permanently earthed.
 The signal/control cables must be screened.

MN740 CE Guidelines C‐1


Grounding for Enclosure Mounting (Class B) also see Section 3
 The unit is installed for Class B operation when mounted inside an enclosure that has 10dB
attenuation from 30 to 100MHz (typically the attenuation provided by a metal cabinet with no
opening greater than 0.15m), using the recommended AC supply filter and having met all cable
requirements.
Note: Radiated magnetic and electric fields inside the cubicle will be high and components installed inside
must be sufficiently immune.
 The control, external filter and associated equipment are mounted onto a conducting, metal
panel. Do not use enclosures that use insulating mounting panels or undefined mounting
structures. Cables between the control and motor must be screened or in conduit and terminated
at the control.
Using CE approved components will not guarantee a CE compliant system!
1. The components used in the drive, installation methods used, materials selected for
interconnection of components are important.
2. The installation methods, interconnection materials, shielding, filtering and grounding of the
system as a whole will determine CE compliance.
3. The responsibility of CE mark compliance rests entirely with the party who offers the end system
for sale (such as an OEM or system integrator).
Baldor products which meet the EMC directive requirements are indicated with a “CE” mark. A signed CE
declaration of conformity is provided in this section.

EMC Wiring Technique

1 CABINET
The drawing shows an electroplated zinc coated enclosure, which is connected
to ground.
Y This enclosure has the following advantages:
Ca‐ - All parts mounted on the back plane are connected to ground.
pa‐
- All shield (screen) connections are connected to ground.
citor
Within the cabinet there should be a spatial separation between power wiring
(motor and AC power cables) and control wiring.

2 SCREEN CONNECTIONS
All connections between components must use shielded cables. The cable
shields must be connected to the enclosure. Use conductive clamps to ensure
good ground connection. With this technique, a good ground shield can be
achieved.

3 EMC - FILTER
The EMI or main filter should be mounted next to the power supply (here BPS).
For the connection to and from the main filter screened cables should be used.
The cable screens should be connected to screen clamps on both sides.
(Exception: Analog Command Signal).

4 Grounding (Earth)
For safety reasons (VDE0160), all BALDOR components must be connected to
ground with a separate wire. The diameter of the wire must be at minimum
AWG#6 (10mm ). Ground connections (dashed lines) must be made from the
central ground to the regen resistor enclosure and from the central ground to
the Shared Power Supply.

5 Y-CAPACITOR
The connection of the regeneration resistor can cause RFI (radio frequency
interference) to be very high. To minimize RFI, a Y-capacitor is used. The
capacitor should only be connected between the dynamic brake resistor
housing and terminal pin R1 (lead from Lin).

C‐2 CE Guidelines MN740


EMC Installation Instructions
To ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), the following installation instructions should be completed.
These steps help to reduce interference.
Consider the following:
 Grounding of all system elements to a central ground point
 Shielding of all cables and signal wires
 Filtering of power lines

A proper enclosure should have the following characteristics:


A) All metal conducting parts of the enclosure must be electrically connected to the back plane.
These connections should be made with a grounding strap from each element to a central
grounding point .
B) Keep the power wiring (motor and power cable) and control wiring separated. If these wires must
cross, be sure they cross at 90 degrees to minimize noise due to induction.
C) The shield connections of the signal and power cables should be connected to the screen rails or
clamps. The screen rails or clamps should be conductive clamps fastened to the cabinet. 
D) The cable to the regeneration resistor must be shielded. The shield must be connected to ground
at both ends.
E) The location of the AC mains filter has to be situated close to the drive so the AC power wires
are as short as possible.
F) Wires inside the enclosure should be placed as close as possible to conducting metal, cabinet
walls and plates. It is advised to terminate unused wires to chassis ground.
G) To reduce ground current, use at least a 10mm2 (6 AWG) solid wire for ground connections.
Grounding in general describes all metal parts which can be connected to a protective conductor, e.g. housing of
cabinet, motor housing, etc. to a central ground point. This central ground point is then connected to the main
plant (or building) ground.
 Or run as twisted pair at minimum.

Example Cable Screens Grounding


Cable (Twisted Pair Conductors)

Conductive Clamp - Must contact bare cable shield


and be secured to metal backplane.

MN740 CE Guidelines C‐3


Baldor Electric Company
P.O. Box 2400
Fort Smith, Arkansas 72902
(479) 646-4711

Date: 10/5/2005 EC Declaration of Conformity Ref: DE00013-001


This is to certify that Baldor control products comply with the requirements of the CE Directive below and being one
of:-

H2 V/Hz Family (IHH) H2 Closed Vector Family (ZHH) H2 AC Servo Family (SHH)

When used in accordance with the guidance and instructions given in the corresponding Product Installation Manual,
the above Electronic Products conform with the protection requirements of Council Directive 89/336/EEC and
amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC, Article 10 and Annex 1, relating to the EMC Directive and Manufacturers
Declaration for EMC, by the application of the relevant clauses of the following standards:-
Standard EMC Directive Manufacturers
Declaration
BSEN61800-3 : 1996 + A11 (2000) n n
BSEN61000-3-2: 1995 n n

And with the protection requirements of Council Directive 72/23/EEC (amended by 93/68/EEC) article 13 and Annex
III relating to Low Voltage Equipment, by following the guidance found in the relevant clauses of the following
standard:-
Standard Title
EN50178: 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations

Machinery Directive
The above Electronic Products are components to be incorporated into machinery and may not be operated alone.
The complete machinery or installation using this equipment may only be put in to service when the safety
considerations of the Directive 89/392/EEC are fully adhered to. Particular reference should be made to EN60204-1
(Safety of Machinery – Electrical Equipment of Machines).
All instructions, warnings and safety information of the Product Installation Manual must be adhered to.

Signed:

David Benson
Engineering Manager

C‐4 CE Guidelines MN740


Appendix D

Remote Keypad Mounting Template

2.81
0.28

4.99
1.38 Knockout

3.95

1.89

Drill #27 Hole


3 Places

1.07
2.14

Note: Template may be distorted due to reproduction.


KP0030A00

MN740 Appendix D‐1


D‐2 Appendix MN740
Baldor District Offices
Important:
Be sure to check www.baldor.com for the latest software, firmware
and drivers for your H2 product.

BALDOR ELECTRIC COMPANY


P.O. Box 2400
Ft. Smith, AR 72901-2400
(479) 646-4711
Fax (479) 648-5792
www.baldor.com

W Baldor Electric Company Printed in USA


MN740 5/07
Series H2 AC V/Hz and Open Vector Control MN740

You might also like